Home

Kenmore 253 Refrigerator User Manual

Contents

1. eere 5 52 Electrical System eese 5 53 Capacities and Specifications 5 57 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Service Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it We hope you will go to your dealer for all your ser vice and parts needs Accessories and Modifications When you add non Suzuki accessories to your vehicle they can affect your vehicle s performance and safety including such things as airbags braking stability ride and handling emissions systems aerody namics durability and electronic systems like anti lock brakes traction control and stability control Some of these accesso ries may even cause malfunction or dam age not covered by warranty Suzuki accessories are designed to com plement and function with other systems on your vehicle Your Suzuki dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine Suzuki accessories When you go to your Suzuki dealer and ask for Suzuki accesso ries you will know that Suzuki trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine Suzuki accesso ries 5 1 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles including this one contain and or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm Engine exhaust many parts and systems including some inside the vehicle man
2. 2 14 B eicere ciae ar iion tan Sr aaa TE 5 18 Battery Run Down Protection eee 3 9 Battery Warning Light eere 3 19 Before Driving eese nennen enne 2 11 Before Leaving on a Long Trip 4 12 Brake System Warning Light eere 3 19 mr Ha 5 17 Braking g 4 3 Bulb Replacement nnne 5 23 Buying New Tires enne nnne 5 34 California Fuel California Proposition 65 Warning 5 1 Capacities and Specifications 5 57 Care of Safety Belts eese 5 49 Care of the CD and DVD Player 3 74 Care of Your CDs and DVDs 3 74 Cargo Lamp 1 3 9 Carrier Assembly Differential Rear Drive Module 5 22 Center Console Storage Area 2 22 Change Engine Oil Light eene 3 24 Changing a Flat Tire eere 5 38 Checking the Restraint Systems 1 42 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 5 Chemical Paint Spott
3. eere 5 52 Vehicle Identification Number eren 7 1 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 5 52 W Warning Lights Gages and Indicators 3 15 Warranties aaaea 7 2 Washing Your Vehicle eere 5 49 Weatherstrips eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene 5 49 What Makes an Airbag Inflate 1 38 What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates 1 38 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance 5 36 Wheel Replacement 5 37 When It Is Time for New Tires eene 5 34 When Should an Airbag Inflate 1 37 Where Are the Airbags seen 1 35 Where to Put the Restraint eere 1 24 WINCOWS 2 8 Windshield and Wiper Blades 5 50 Windshield Washer 3 5 Windshield Washer Fluid eene 5 16 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 25 Windshield Wiper FUSES 5 53 Windshield Wipers eere 3 4 Winter Driving
4. eeeeeeeeer enne 4 14 Y Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 1 Your Vehicle and the Environment 6 1 8 6 SERVICE STATION INFORMATION Fuel recommendation See page 5 2 Engine oil recommendation Engine oil with Starburst symbol Standard GM6094M Viscosity SAE 5W 30 For further details see Engine Oil in the SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE section Brake and clutch fluid DOT3 Tire cold pressure See the Tire Information Label located on the driver s door lock pillar SUZUKI MOTOR 99011 78J00 03E CORPORATION Printed in U S A gt lt m SJ 3 0 00f8Z 1 L066
5. gt Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Engine Air Cleaner Filter in this section Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Out of View Refer to Power Steering Fluid in this section Engine Oil Fill Cap Out of View Refer to When to Add Engine Oil under Engine Oil in this section Engine Oil Dipstick Refer to Checking Engine Oil under Engine Oil in this sec tion Brake Fluid Reservoir Refer to Brake Fluid under Brakes F G H Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir 1708418 Underhood Fuse Block Refer to Engine Compartment Fuse Block in this section Remote Positive Terminal Refer to Jump Starting in this section Engine Coolant Recovery Tank Refer to Cooling System in this section Refer to Adding Washer Fluid under Windshield Washer Fluid in this sec tion SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel In order to get an accurate reading the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop Refer to Engine Compartment Over view in this section for the location of the engine oil dipstick 1 Turn off the engine and give the oil sev eral minutes to drain back into the oil pan If you do not do this the oil dip stick might not show the actual level 2 Pull out the dipstick and clean it with
6. 806596 If you are using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch the trailer tongue weight A should be 10 percent to 15 per DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE cent of the total loaded trailer weight B Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for your vehicle 400 Ibs 181 kg After you have loaded your trailer weigh the trailer and then the tongue separately to see if the weights are proper If they are not you may be able to get them right sim ply by moving some items around in the trailer Total Weight on Your Vehicle s Tires Be sure your vehicle s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires You will find these numbers on the Certification Tire Label at the rear edge of the driver s door or refer to Loading Your Vehicle in this section Then be sure you do not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle including the weight of the trailer tongue Hitches It is important to have the correct hitch equipment Crosswinds large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you will need the right hitch Here are some rules to follow f you will be pulling a trailer that when loaded will weigh more than 2000 Ibs 900 kg be sure to use a properly mounted weight carrying hitch and sway control of the proper size This equip ment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling when you re driving 4 22 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Will you have to m
7. nennen nennen nennt nnn nain nnn 3 8 Door Light nennen 3 25 Door LOCKS 2 5 Doors and Locks esee nnne 2 5 Driver Information Center DIC 3 27 Driver Position esses nennen nnne 1 11 Driver Seat Height Adjuster eese 1 1 Driving at Night eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenennnnn ennt 4 9 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads 4 10 Drunken Driving eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee enne 4 1 8 2 E Electric Power Management eene 3 9 Electrical System essent 5 53 Electronic Stability Control eere 4 5 Emission Compliance Label for U S A 7 2 Engine Air Cleaner Filter eene 5 9 Engine Compartment Overview eee 5 6 Engine Coolant 5 11 Engine Coolant Heater eene 2 14 Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 3 21 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light 3 20 Engine Drive Belt Routing eene 6 17 Engine Exhaust ener nnnm 2 19 Engine
8. EJECT Press the CD eject button to eject CD s To eject the CD that is currently playing press and release this button A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD can be removed If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing 44 Tune Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD currently playing KI SEEK Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than ten sec onds have played Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD 4 REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse play back quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track appears on the display gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance play back quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track appears on the display RDM Random With random you can listen to the tracks in random rather than sequential order To use random press the CD AUX button insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player A RDM label appears on
9. nennen nnne 7 1 Malfunction Indicator Lamp If a Tire Goes Flat 5 37 Manual Lumbar ececccccecccccccececcccccesecccccusecccceseeeeccesueeseceeeseeees If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow 4 16 Manual Rearview Mirror Ignition Positions eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeennn 2 12 Manual Reclining Seatbacks Infants and Young Children eene 1 19 Manual Seats cssssssssssssssssssssssssesssesessseseeeseneseseseeseeseaes Inflation Tire Pressure sess 5 30 Manual Shift Mode MSM Automatic Transaxle MUN 2 16 Instrument Panel Brightness 3 8 Map Lamps ette 3 9 Instrument Panel Cluster eee 3 15 2 20 Instrument Panel Overview seen 3 1 Multi Band Antenna 3 74 Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces 5 49 8 3 INDEX N National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA Navigation Radio System New Vehicle Break In Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Off Road Recovery Oil Pressure Light Older Children eese eese nennen nnne On Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data Recorders Other Warning Devices Outlet Adjustment Outsid
10. 4 21 Halogen amp 5 23 License Plate Lamp DERIT DOTEM 5 24 Hazard Warning Flashers eene 3 3 Liftgate rc S 2 7 Head Restraints 5 ire rcr hanan eana 1 4 Loading Your Vehicle essere tnnt 4 16 Headlamp ee ke ten 3 7 Lockout Protection ceccccccccceccccceceeccccececeececcceceeeeeececeeneeeeccecens 2 6 Heated Seals ae 1 2 Loss of Control c cccccccecccccccecececccceseccccceseccccceeececceceeeecceneeecees 4 8 Highbeam On Light nna 3 25 Low Fuel Warning Light eerte 3 26 Highway Hypnosis 4 12 Lower Anchors Hill and Mountain Roads n 4 13 Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH 1 26 Hood Release viisicceseissescessscnsnnctsscccectesecessedessssesveccunanecacocebens 5 5 Luggage TEENS 2 22 POM IN er 3 3 How Does an Airbag Restrain 1 38 Maintenance Record except CANADA 6 18 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly 1 11 Maintenance Requirements Maintenance Schedule Identification Numbers
11. 812700 Your vehicle has a battery warning light If this light comes on while you are driving be sure to turn off accessories such as the radio and climate control system Have your vehicle serviced right away The SER VICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message may also appear in the Driver Information Center Refer to DIC Warn ings and Messages in this section for more information 3 19 Brake System Warning Light Your vehicle s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts If one part is not working the other part can still work and stop you For good braking though you need both parts working well If the brake system warning light comes on there is a brake problem Have your brake system inspected right away United States BRAKE 1240159 Canada 1 The brake light is located the instrument panel cluster This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If it does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem When the ignition is on the brake light will come on when you set your parking brake The light will stay on if your parking brake does not release fully A chime will also sound if the parking brake is not fully released and the vehicle is moving If it stays on after your parking brake is fully released it means you have a brake prob lem The brake light will also come on to indi cate a low b
12. Press this button to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus a Audio Stream Press this button to cycle through audio stream formats located on the DVD A disc 3 56 INSTRUMENT PANEL There is not any type of notification for the customer to see through the radio display but VSM has a text field that shows audio stream changing Inserting a Disc To play a disc gently insert the disc with the label side up into the loading slot The DVD player might not accept some paper labeled media The player starts loading the disc into the system and show Load ing Disc on the radio display At the same time the radio displays a softkey menu of option s Some discs automatically play the movie while others default to the soft key menu display which requires the Play Enter or Navigation softkeys to be pressed either by softkey or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control Loading a disc into the system depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system press the stop button on the remote control or press the pushbutton located under the stop or the play pause symbol tags displayed on the radio If the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD V press the DVD CD AUX but ton to make DVD V the active source To resume DVD playback press th
13. SUZUKI 2007 XLT OWNER S MANUAL Keep With Vehicle At All Times Contains Important Information On Safety Operation amp Maintenance SUZUKI Caring for Customers September 2006 Part No 99011 78J00 03E Prepared by SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION September 2006 Part No 9901 1 78J00 03E Printed in U S A TP270 This owner s manual applies to the XL7 series NOTE The illustrated model is one of the XL7 series COPYRIGHT SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION 2006 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing SUZUKI and welcome to our growing family Your choice was a wise one SUZUKI products are a great value that will give you years of driving pleasure This Owner s Manual was prepared to help you have a safe enjoyable and trouble free experience with your SUZUKI In it you will learn about the vehicle s operation its safety features and maintenance requirements Please read it carefully before operating your vehicle Afterwards keep this Manual in the glove box for future reference Should you resell the vehicle please leave this Manual with it for the next owner In addition to the Owner s Manual the other booklets provided with your SUZUKI explain the vehicle s warranties We recommend you read them as well to familiarize yourself with this important information When planning the regular scheduled maintenance of your SUZUKI
14. 5 1 ence eetiece eren ic nea Caec nE 5 7 Engine Oil Life System eene 5 8 Engine Overheating eere 5 12 Engine Serial Number cerent 7 1 F 5 eire eret Eee 5 48 Filling a Portable Fuel Container 5 4 Filling the 5 3 Finish Care eet 5 50 Finish Damage eeeeeeeeeeeeneee nennen nnn nennen nnn 5 51 Fog Lamp Light 3 24 Fog Lamps 3 8 For CANADA Scheduled Maintenance 6 8 Freeway Driving eene nennen 4 11 Front m anadan dabaa suona 1 1 n 5 2 Fuel Gage eene 3 26 Fuels in Foreign Countries eene 5 3 INDEX Fuses and Circuit Breakers cessere 5 53 J G Jump Starting 5 19 Gasoline Octane 5 2 K Gasoline Specifications sene 5 2 OQ aM n 2 1 Gate Ajar Light ene 3 25 L Glove BOX eeeeeeeee eene eee nen eentnen enn tenttnn nennen ttnnnenntnnnes 2 21 EEEn E A E 5 49 H Level Control 5
15. Brake Adjustment Every time you apply the brakes with or without the vehicle moving your brakes adjust for wear Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is com plex Its many parts have to be of top qual ity and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality brake parts When you replace parts of your braking system for example when your brake pads wear down and you need new ones put in be sure you get new approved replacement parts If you do not your brakes may no longer work properly For example if someone puts in brake pads that are wrong for your vehicle the balance between your front and rear brakes can change for the worse The braking performance you have come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts Battery Your vehicle has a maintenance free bat tery When it is time for a new battery get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery s label We recommend an ACDelco replacement battery 5 18 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Jump Starting If your vehicle s battery has run down you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely For battery replacement see your dealer or the service manual CAUTION If the other vehicle s system is
16. WARNING If a LATCH type child restraint is not attached to anchors the restraint will not be able to protect the child cor rectly In a crash the child could be seriously injured or killed Make sure that a LATCH type child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual A WARNING Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the vehicle is designed to hold only one child restraint Attach ing more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash A child or oth ers could be injured if this happens To help prevent injury to people and damage to your vehicle attach only one child restraint per anchor A WARNING Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Secure any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock if your vehicle has one after the child restraint has been installed Be sure to follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacturer CAUTION Contact between the child restraint or the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle s safety belt assembly may cause dam
17. Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odom eter The digital odometer will read 999999 if someone tries to turn it back You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer then it must be If not then it is set at zero and a label must be put on the driver s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed Trip Odometer Your trip odometer is located in the Driver Information Center and shows how far your vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last reset For more infor mation refer to DIC Operation and Dis plays in this section Tachometer The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm CAUTION If you operate the engine with the tachometer in the solid red area your vehicle could be damaged The dam ages would not be covered by your warranty Do not operate the engine in the solid red area Safety Belt Reminder Light When the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts unless the drivers safety belt is already buckled 808234 The safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several seconds then it will flash for several more If the driver s belt is already buckled nei ther the chime nor the light will come on Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
18. A Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative Terminal B Good Battery or Remote Positive and Remote Negative Terminals C Dead Battery or Remote Positive Terminal To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following 1 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle that had the dead bat tery 2 Disconnect the black negative cable from the vehicle with the good battery 3 Disconnect the red positive cable from the vehicle with the good battery 4 Disconnect the red positive cable from the other vehicle 5 Return the fuse block cover to its origi nalposition All Wheel Drive If you have an all wheel drive vehicle be sure to perform the lubricant checks described in this section However there are two additional systems that need lubri cation Transfer Case Power Transfer Unit When to Check Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant Refer to Scheduled Maintenance in Maintenance Schedule in the Mainte nance Schedule section How to Check Lubricant 1765710 A Fill Plug B Drain Plug SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubri cant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole
19. Driving Your Vehicle section GAWR FRT Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle Refer to Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section GAWR RR Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle Refer to Loading Your Vehicle in Your 5 28 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section Intended Outboard Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle Kilopascal kPa The metric unit for air pressure Light Truck LT Metric Tire A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles Load Index An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall Maximum Load Rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight The sum of curb weight accessory weight vehicle capacity weight and production options weight Normal Occupant Weight The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg Refer to Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Ve
20. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubri cants in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section Carrier Assembly Differential Rear Drive Module When to Check and Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to check the lubricant and when to change it Refer to Sched uled Maintenance in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section 5 22 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE How to Check Lubricant AWD Differential Case 1716440 A Fill Plug B Drain Plug To get an accurate reading the vehicle should be on a level surface If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole you ll need to add some lubri cant Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole A fluid loss could indicate a problem check and have it repaired if needed What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubri cants in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section 5 23 Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs refer to Replacement Bulbs in this sec tion For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section contact your dealer Halogen Bulbs A WARNING Halogen bulbs h
21. played on the DIC to select it EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu Press the vehicle information button until FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS TO EXIT appears in the DIC display Press the set reset button to exit the menu If you do not exit pressing the vehicle information button again will return you to the beginning of the vehicle information menu Exiting the Feature Settings Menu The feature settings menu will be exited when any of the following occurs The vehicle is shifted out of PARK P The vehicle is no longer in RUN The trip fuel DIC button is pressed The end of the feature settings menu is reached and exited A 40 second time period has elapsed with no selection made 3 39 Audio System s Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the pages following to famil iarize yourself with its features Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer driving experience Refer to Defensive Driving in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section By taking a few moments to read this manual and get familiar with your vehicle s audio system you can use it with less effort as well as take advantage of its features While your vehicle is parked set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speak ers Then when driving conditions permit you can t
22. s interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often Although not always visible dust and dirt can accumu late on your upholstery Dirt can damage carpet fabric leather and plastic sur faces Regular vacuuming is recom mended to remove particles from your upholstery It is important to keep your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled Soils should be removed as quickly as possible Your vehicle s interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to your home furnishings may also transfer color to your vehicle s interior When cleaning your vehicle s interior only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned Permanent dam age may result from using cleaners on sur faces for which they were not intended Use glass cleaner only on glass Remove any accidental over spray from other sur faces immediately To prevent over spray apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth CAUTION If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on your vehi cle you could scratch the glass and or cause damage to the rear window defogger When cleaning the glass on your vehicle use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner Many cleaners contain solvents that may become concentrated in your vehicle s breathing space Before usi
23. 7 Remove all of the wheel nuts 8 Remove the flat tire A WARNING Rust or dirt on the wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make the wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emer gency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off 7 e 811105 9 Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts mounting surfaces and spare wheel 10 Place the compact spare tire on the wheel mounting surface A WARNING Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts If you do the nuts might come loose Your wheel could fall off caus ing a serious accident 11 Reinstall the wheel nuts Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub 1152288 12 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle counterclockwise A WARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose and even come off This could lead to an accident Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts If you have to replace them be sure to get new SUZUKI original equipment wheel nuts Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tight ened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification Refer to Capac
24. 85 eth anol and other fuels containing more than 10 ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels 5 2 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE CAUTION Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol Do not use fuel containing methanol It can corrode metal parts in the fuel sys tem and also damage plastic and rub ber parts That damage would not be covered under your warranty Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopen tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT We rec ommend against the use of such gaso lines Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the emission control system may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on If this occurs return to your dealer for service 5 3 Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving in another country outside the United States or Canada the proper fuel might be hard to find Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by your war ranty To check the fuel availability ask an auto club or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you will be driving Filling the Tank WARNING Fuel v
25. Continued WARNING Continued Worn old tires can cause acci dents If your tread is badly worn or if your tires have been damaged replace them Refer to Inflation Tire Pressure in this section for inflation pressure adjustment for high speed driving Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall The examples below show a typical passenger vehicle tire and a com pact spare tire sidewall Passenger P Metric Tire Example 1376078 A Tire Size The tire size is a combination of let Uniform Tire SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE ters and numbers used to define a particular tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description See the Tire Size illus tration later in this section for more detail TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to SUZUKI s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall SUZUKI s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines DOT Department of Transportation The Department of Transportation DOT code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following DOT Department of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN T
26. Driving Your Vehicle section and All Wheel Drive Disabled Light in this section for more information BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE This message displays when the charging system detects that the battery is being drained You may notice that the vehicle attempts to reduce the drain for you by turning off accessories such as interior fans rear defogger and heated seats Turn off all accessories If the vehicle is not run ning start and run the engine for at least 10 minutes to allow the battery to recharge If the engine is running and the condition persists see your dealer immedi ately BUCKLE PASSENGER SEATBELT This message reminds you to buckle the passengers safety belt Refer to Passen ger Sensing System in Airbag System in the Seats and Restraint Systems section This message displays and a chime sounds when the ignition is on the driver s safety belt is buckled the passengers safety belt is unbuckled with the passenger airbag enabled and the vehicle is in motion You should have the passenger buckle their safety belt This reminder will be repeated if the igni tion is on the vehicle is in motion the driver is buckled and the passenger is still unbuckled and the passenger airbag is 3 30 INSTRUMENT PANEL enabled If the passenger s safety belt is already buckled this message and chime will not come on BUCKLE SEATBELT This message reminds you to buckle the driver s safety belt This messa
27. If your vehicle has roof mounted airbags they are designed to provide both side impact protection and rollover protection Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS A WARNING Both frontal and roof mounted roll over airbags inflate with great force faster than the blink of an eye If you are too close to an inflating airbag as you would be if you were leaning for ward it could seriously injure you Safety belts help keep you in position for airbag inflation before and during a crash Always wear your safety belt even with frontal airbags The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door in the first or second row seats or the rear windows in the third row seat if your vehicle has roof mounted rollover air bags 1 34 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS A WARNING Anyone who is up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide Always secure children properly in your vehi cle To read how ref
28. See your dealer for service Passenger Sensing System Your vehicle has a passenger sensing sys tem for the right front passenger The pas senger airbag status indicator will be visible when you start your vehicle in the instrument panel 1 39 United States PASSENGER amp 2 1476572 Canada IN e 1476529 The words ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off will be visible during the system check When the system check is com plete either the word ON or the word OFF or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will be visible Refer to Passenger Airbag Status Indicator in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passengers frontal airbag under certain conditions The driver s air bags are not part of the passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the right front pas senger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the passengers frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or not Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a for ward facing ch
29. The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and others that you have a prob lem The front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off 1223926 The hazard warning flasher button is located in the center of the instrument panel The hazard warning flashers work no mat ter what position the key is in and even if the key is not in the ignition switch Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off Press the button again to turn the flashers off While the hazard warning flashers are on the turn signals do not work Other Warning Devices If you carry reflective triangles you can set them up at the side of the road about 300 feet 100 m behind your vehicle Horn Press near or on the horn symbols on your steering wheel pad to sound the horn 3 3 Tilt Wheel Your vehicle has a tilt wheel that allows you to adjust the steering wheel 1262086 The lever to tilt the steering wheel is located on the left side of the steering col umn To tilt the wheel hold the steering wheel and push the lever down Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and pull the lever up firmly to lock the col umn in place Turn Signal Multifunction Lever 1766015 The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following amp Turn and Lane Change Signals Refer to Turn and Lane Change Sig nals in this se
30. Then pull the retainer C through the wheel Pull the secondary retainer C through the wheel The secondary retainer is located under the secondary latch spring and is smaller than the spare tire retainer to allow it to fit through the road wheel center cap hole Place the wheel wrench A onto the hoist drive nut Raise the tire fully against the under side of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise Continue turning it clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice This indicates that the tire is secure and the cable is tight The spare tire hoist cannot be overtight ened 811589 6 Make sure the tire is stored securely Push pull A and then try to turn B the tire If the tire moves use the wheel wrench and socket end of the extension to tighten the cable 7 Return the equipment to the proper location in the vehicle as shown next To store the tools do the following 1 Place the wheel wrench into the bag 2 Use the hook and loop fastener straps to secure the bag to the fully collapsed jack 1399885 3 Install the jack in the right side panel of cargo area and secure with the wing bolt 4 Reinstall the access door Storing a Full Sized Flat Tire To store a full sized flat tire do the follow ing 1 Remove the tire storage bag and cable package from the jack storage area 2 If your vehicle has aluminum wheels remove the center cap by
31. WNDW Power Windows EM Power Seats EMPTY Empty Misc Usage PLR Fuse Puller 5 55 5 E s e LEA 37018 4 47 56 61 5 20 24 5 ESENIEI 1271 49 54 14 29 39145 1739443 The engine compartment fuse block is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment Refer to Engine Compartment Overview in this section for more information on loca tion Fuses Usage 1 Cooling Fan 2 2 Cooling Fan 1 3 Auxiliary Power 4 Rear Climate Control 5 Spare 6 Spare 7 Anti lock Brake System 8 Air Conditioning Clutch 9 Drivers Side Low Beam 10 Daytime Running Lamp 2 11 Passenger s Side High Beam 12 Passenger s Side Park Lamp 13 Horn 14 Driver s Side Park Lamp 15 Starter Electronic Throttle Con 16 trol Engine Control Mod ule 17 Emission Device 1 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Relays Usage 18 Even Coils Injectors 37 eee Sd 31 Ignition Main 19 Odd Coils Injectors 46 Air Conditioning Compres 20 Emission Device 2 38 Sop eich 21 Spare 39 Fuel Pump 47 Powertrain 22 Powertrain Control Mod 40 Bog CORSSODPEONSE 51 ule Ignition 55 Crank 23 Transmission 2 BIPNDRSL
32. be sure itis designed to be used in a motor vehicle If it is the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards 1 20 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS The restraint manufacturer s instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particu lar child restraint In addition there are many kinds of restraints available for chil dren with special needs A WARNING Newborn infants need complete sup port including support for the head and neck This is necessary because a newborn infant s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body In a crash an infant in a rear facing seat settles into the restraint so the crash forces can be distributed across the stron gest part of an infant s body the back and shoulders Infants always should be secured in appropriate infant restraints 1 21 WARNING The body structure of a young child is quite unlike that of an adult or older child for whom the safety belts are designed A young child s hip bones are still so small that the vehi cle s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones as it should Instead it may settle up around the child s abdomen In a crash the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries Young children always should be secured in appropr
33. carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction Be sure you properly Secure these items in your vehicle Driving on Snow or Ice Most of the time those places where the tires meet the road probably have good traction However if there is snow or ice between the tires and the road you can have a very slippery situation You will have a lot less traction or grip and will need to be very careful DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 808402 What is the worst time for this Wet ice Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least trac tion of all You can get wet ice when it is about freezing 32 F 0 C and freezing rain begins to fall Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there Whatever the condition smooth ice packed blowing or loose snow drive with caution Traction control improves your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road But you can turn the traction system off if you ever need to You should turn the trac tion system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow Refer to If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow in this section Even though your 4 14 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE vehicle has a traction system you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions Under certain conditions you may want to turn the traction s
34. condition be sure to maintain your vehicle properly Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition But we do not know exactly how you will drive it You may drive very short distances only a few times a week Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot dusty weather You may use your vehicle in making deliveries Or you may drive it to work to do errands or in many other ways Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles maintenance needs vary You may need more frequent checks and replacements So please read the fol lowing and note how you drive If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition see your dealer This schedule is for vehicles that carry passengers and cargo within rec ommended limits You will find these lim its on the Tire and Loading Information label Refer to Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehi cle in the Driving Your Vehicle section are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits use the recommended fuel Refer to Gasoline Octane in Fuel in the Ser vice and Appearance Care section The services in Scheduled Maintenance in this section should be performed when indicated Refer to Additional Required Services in this section for further informa tion A WARNING Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
35. gear A shift is required to protect the engine or transmission or The vehicle slows almost to a stop and then automatic downshift will occur 2 Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward to downshift FEATURES AND CONTROLS A box with the current gear will display in the middle of the telltale line below the gear selection While using the Manual Shift Mode MSM feature the vehicle will have firmer shifting and increased performance You can use this for sport driving or when climbing hills to stay in gear longer or to downshift for more power or engine braking The transaxle will only allow you to shift into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions per minute RPM The transaxle will not downshift to the next lower gear if the engine RPM is too high The transaxle will not automatically shift to the next higher gear if the engine RPM is too high When coming to a stop in the manual mode the vehicle will automatically downshift to the proper gear based on speed Upon acceleration you will need to manually upshift to the desired gear 2 16 FEATURES AND CONTROLS SECOND 2 Gear Start Feature CAUTION If you attempt a third gear start while trailering or towing a heavy load you will notice reduced engine power This could overheat and damage your transaxle Do not attempt a third gear start while trailering or towing your vehicle When accelerating your
36. place and rest No one can see as well at night as in the daytime But as we get older these differ ences increase A 50 year old driver may require at least twice much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision For example if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night But if you are driving do not wear sunglasses at night They may cut down on glare from headlamps but they also make a lot of things invisible You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps It can take a sec ond or two or even several seconds for your eyes to re adjust to the dark When you are faced with severe glare as from a driver who does not lower the high beams or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps slow down a little Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean inside and out Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve Keep your eyes moving that way it is easier to pick out dimly lighted objects Just as the headlamps sho
37. pleted a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the fabric or carpet Leather A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a soft cloth damp 5 49 ened with a mild soap solution can be used Allow the leather to dry naturally Do not use heat to dry Never use steam to clean leather Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may per manently change the appearance and feel of your leather and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based prod ucts or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior because they can alter the appearance by increas ing the gloss in a non uniform manner Never use shoe polish on your leather Instrument Panel Vinyl and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust If a more thorough cleaning is necessary a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt Never use spot lifters or removers on plas tic surfaces Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may perma nently change the appearance and feel of your interior and are not recommended Do not use silicone or wax based prod ucts or those containing organic solvents to clean your vehicle s interior b
38. we recommend you visit your local SUZUKI dealership Their fac tory trained technicians will provide the best possible service and use only genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION SERVICE STATION GUIDE ou ARON Fuel See section 5 Engine hood see section 5 Tire changing tools see section 5 Engine oil dipstick lt Yellow gt see section 5 Engine coolant see section 5 Windshield washer fluid see section 5 Battery see section 5 Tire pressure see tire information label on driver s door lock pillar Spare tire see section 5 Litho in U S A Part NO 15900142 A First Printing TABLE OF CONTENTS stats anD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS E California Proposition 65 Warning FEATURES AND CONTENTS A WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constitu ents and certain product compo nents contain or emit chemicals DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE other reproductive harm INSTRUMENT PANEL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE GENERAL INFORMATION INDEX LOCATION OF WARNING 9 MESSAGES a Read and follow all of the warnings labels etc on your vehicle Make sure you i understand all of them Keep them on the vehicle Do not remove the messages for any reason If a label comes o
39. will appear on the display Refer to CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON under DIC Warnings and Messages in this sec tion You should change your oil as soon as possible Refer to Engine Oil in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section In addition to the engine oil life system moni toring the oil life additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Sched ule in this manual Refer to Scheduled Maintenance in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section for more information Remember you must reset the OIL LIFE yourself after each oil change It will not reset itself Also be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE accidentally at any time other 3 29 than when the oil has just been changed It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change To reset the engine oil life system refer to Engine Oil Life System in Check ing Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section UNITS Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement Once in this display press the set reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per square inch psi or kilo pascals kPa Press the vehicle informa tion button until the DIC shows FRONT
40. 78J00 Spark Plugs 1119A 78J00 Windshield Wiper Blades Driver s Side 24 inches 60 0 cm 38340 78J00 Passenger s Side 19 inches 47 5 cm 38340 78J10 Rear 13 0 inches 33 0 cm 38820 78J00 Engine Drive Belt Routing 3 6L V6 Engine 6 17 1686383 Maintenance Record except CANADA After the scheduled services are performed record the date odometer reading who performed the service and the type of services per formed in the boxes provided Refer to Maintenance Requirements in this section Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services in this section can be added on the following record pages You should retain all maintenance receipts Maintenance record MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance or Maintenance Services Performed 6 18 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE GENERAL INFORMATION GENERAL INFORMATION Identification Numbers eere 7 1 Safety Certification Label eere 7 1 Emission Compliance Label for U S A 7 2 Warranties 7 2 On Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data Recorders eere 7 2 Reporting Safety Defects 7 3 GENERAL INFORMA
41. Brake System Warning Light in this section Have the brake system ser viced by your dealer as soon as possible SERVICE STABILITY CTRL Control This message displays if there has been a problem detected with the Electronic Sta bility Control ESC system A warning light also appears on the instrument panel clus ter Refer to Traction Control System TCS Warning Light in this section Refer to Electronic Stability Control in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section for more information If this message turns on while you are driv ing pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then back on If this message still stays on or turns back on again while you are driving your vehicle needs service Have the ESC system inspected by your dealer as soon as possi ble SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the theft deterrent system A fault has been detected in the system which means that the system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle The vehicle usually restarts however you may want to take the vehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine Refer to PASS Key 11 Operation in Theft Deterrent Systems in the Features and Controls section for more information SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressur
42. Clear Press this button within three seconds after entering a numeric selection to clear all numeric inputs Double Digit Entries Press this button to select chapter or track numbers greater than nine Press this but ton before entering the number Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries do the following 1 Remove the battery compartment door located on the bottom of the remote control 2 Replace the two batteries in the com partment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Close the battery door securely If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place INSTRUMENT PANEL Problem Recommended Action No power The ignition might not be turned on or in accessory The picture does not fill the screen There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched out Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by pressing the display menu button on the remote control In auxiliary mode the picture moves or scrolls Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices The remote control does not work Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly After stoppin
43. Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities You will save time and energy Refer to Freeway Driving in this section Treat a green light as a warning signal A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it When a light turns green and just before you start to move check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light Freeway Driving 7 J 89 808373 Mile for mile freeways also called thru ways parkways expressways turnpikes or superhighways are the safest of all roads But they have their own special rules The most important advice on freeway driving is Keep up with traffic and keep to the right Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane At the entrance there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp you should begin to check traffic Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed Switch on your turn signal check your mirrors and glance over your shoul der as often as necessary Try to blend smoothly with the tr
44. Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone including pregnant women Like all occupants they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts 1379057 A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible below the rounding throughout the pregnancy The best way to protect the fetus is to pro tect the mother When a safety belt is worn properly it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash For pregnant women as for anyone the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them prop erly 1 14 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Right Front Passenger Position To learn how to wear the right front pas sengers safety belt properly refer to Driver Position in this section The right front passengers safety belt works the same way as the driver s safety belt except for the following If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the way you will engage the child restraint locking feature If this hap pens just let the belt go back all the way and start again When the safety belt is not in use slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the safety belt near the guide loop Rear Seat Passengers It is very important for rear seat passen gers to buckle up Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes tha
45. Refer to Overheated Engine Protection Oper ating Mode in this section for infor mation on driving to a safe place in an emergency If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam the problem may not be too serious Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you Climb a long hill on a hot day Stop after high speed driving Idle for long periods in traffic Tow a trailer If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam try this for a minute or so 1 In heavy traffic let the engine idle in NEUTRAL N while stopped If it is safe to do so pull off the road shift to PARK P or NEUTRAL N and let the engine idle 2 Set the climate controls to the highest heat setting and fan speed and open the windows as necessary 5 13 If you no longer have the overheat warn ing you can drive Just to be safe drive slower for about 10 minutes If the warning does not come back on you can drive nor mally If the warning continues and you have not stopped pull over stop and park your vehicle right away If there is still no sign of steam you can idle the engine for three minutes while you are parked If you still have the warning turn off the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down Also see Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode later in this section You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
46. Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely make sure no one is behind you or on either side of you as you pull the jack out from the under spare 5 43 To release the spare tire from the second ary latch do the following 1 If the cable is not visible start this pro cedure at Step 3 806961 2 If the cable is visible place the wrench on the hoist drive nut and turn the wrench counterclockwise until approxi mately 6 inches 15 cm of cable is exposed 3 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack and raise the jack at least 10 turns 4 Place the jack under the vehicle ahead of the rear bumper Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire 806546 5 Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring 6 Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place this lets you know that the sec ondary latch has released 7 Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise Keep lower ing the jack until the spare tire is resting on the wheel wrench SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Storing a Compact Spare Tire A WARNING Storing a jack a tire or other equip ment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury Ina sudden stop or collision loose equipme
47. Traction Control System TCS turns on Refer to Traction Control System TCS in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section for more information TURN SIGNAL ON This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about 0 75 mile 1 2 km with a turn signal on Refer to Turn Signal Multifunction Lever in this section This message displays and a chime sounds only when the ignition is in RUN The message will not disappear until the turn signal is manually turned off or a turn is completed 3 35 DIC Vehicle Personalization Your vehicle has personalization capabili ties that allow you to program certain fea tures to one preferred setting All of the personalization options may not be available on your vehicle Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC The default settings for the personalization features were set when your vehicle left the factory but may have been changed from their default state since then The personalization preferences are auto matically recalled To change personalization preferences use the following procedure Entering the Feature Settings Menu 1 Turn the ignition on and place the vehi cle in PARK P To avoid excessive drain on the battery it is recommended that the headlamps are turned off 2 Press the vehicle information button until FEATURE SETTINGS PRESS V TO
48. a paper towel or cloth then push it back in all the way Remove it again keeping the tip down and check the level 5 7 When to Add Engine Oil 830434 If the oil is below the cross hatched area at the tip of the dipstick you need to add at least one quart liter of oil But you must use the right kind This section explains what kind of oil to use For engine oil crankcase capacity refer to Capacities and Specifications in this section CAUTION Do not add too much oil If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range the engine could be damaged 1 SAE 5W 30 Ci 824596 SAE 5W 30 may not appear on all caps Refer to Engine Compartment Overview in this section for the location of the engine oil fill cap Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range in the cross hatched area Push the dip stick all the way back in when you are through What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Recommended SAE viscosity grade engine oils HOT WEATHER LOOK FOR THIS SYMBOL AND STANDARD GM6094M SAE 5W 30 DO NOT USE SAE 10W 40 SAE 20W 50 OR ANY OTHER VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED COLD WEATHER 1506679 Look for two things GM6094M Your vehicle s engine requires oil meet ing standard GM6094M Look for and use only an oil that meets standar
49. activated On hot days open the windows to let hot inside air escape then close them This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down It also helps the sys tem to operate more efficiently The air conditioning system removes mois ture from the air so you might notice a small amount of water dripping underneath the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine This is normal yp Heated Seats If your vehicle has heated seats refer to Heated Seats in the Seats and Restraint Systems section for more information Defogging and Defrosting Fog or frost on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity moisture condens ing on the cool window glass This can be minimized if the climate control system is used properly To avoid fogging windows on rainy and humid days at temperatures above freezing run the air conditioning compressor It is best to avoid the use of the recirculation mode except when maxi INSTRUMENT PANEL mum A C performance is needed or for short times to avoid exterior odors Use the floor defog mode to clear the win dows of fog or moisture and warm the pas sengers Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly When either of these modes or the floor mode is selected the system runs the air conditioning compressor and cancels recir culation mode to dry the air however the recirculation light stays on For best result
50. advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid When you start the engine and begin to drive away ABS will check itself You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on and you may even notice that the brake pedal moves a little This is normal If there is a problem with ABS this warning light will stay on Refer to Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE 1527213 Let us say the road is wet and you are driv ing safely Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you You slam on the brakes and continue braking Here is what happens with ABS A computer senses that wheels are slow ing down If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could The computer is pro grammed to make the most of available tire and road conditions This can help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard 1527212 As you brake the computer keeps receiv ing updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly Remember ABS does not change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping dis tance If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you you will not have
51. and off The indicator light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off RES Resume Press this button to resume a set speed and to accelerate the speed SET Set Press this button to set a speed and to decrease the speed Cancel Press this button to cancel cruise control without erasing the set speed from mem ory Setting Cruise Control The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster will come on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed 1 Press the on off button to turn cruise control on 2 Get up to the speed you want 3 Press the SET button and release it 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal When the brakes are applied the cruise control shuts off If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction Control System TCS begins to limit wheel spin the cruise control will automatically disengage Refer to Traction Control System TCS in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section When road condi tions allow the cruise control can be used again Resuming a Set Speed Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brakes This shuts off the cruise control The cruise symbol in the instrument panel cluster will also go off indicating cruise is no longer engaged To return to your previ ously set speed you do not need to go through the set proce
52. and pillar garnish trim roof mounted roll over airbag modules or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system If you have questions call Customer Assis tance SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Now and then make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Keep safety belts clean and dry Refer to Care of Safety Belts in Appearance Care in the Service and Appearance Care section for more information Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash They can rip apart under impact forces If a belt is torn or frayed get a new one right away Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance 1 42 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS CAUTION If you damage the covering for the driver s or the right front passenger s airbag or the side impact airbag cov ering on the ceiling near the side win dows the airbag may not work properly You may have to replace the airbag module in the steering wheel both the airbag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger s airbag or side impact airbag module an
53. and release the bar Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place 1 1 Driver Seat Height Adjuster Power Seat 1618867 If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height adjuster it is located on the out board side of the seat near the front of the seat cushion To raise the seat move the lever upward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height To lower the seat move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height 1407195 If the vehicle has a power seat the control used to operate it is located on the out board side of the driver s seat To adjust the seat do any of the following Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the con trol up or down Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down Manual Lumbar Heated Seats 1211985 If your vehicle has this feature the knob is located on the front of the driver seat lower cushion on the inboard side Turn the knob clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease the lumbar support 1761660 If your vehicle has heated seats the switches are located on the instrument panel near the climate controls The ignition must be on for the heated seats to operate Press the swi
54. and you cannot install it in accordance with the child restraint manufacturers instructions secure it in the second row If your child restraint has the LATCH sys tem refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH in this section There are no top tether anchors in the third row seating positions Do not secure a child restraint in the third row if a national or local law requires that a top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the restraint say that the top tether must be anchored If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system you will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instruc tions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say If you are using a rear facing child restraint in the second row center position install the armrest retention strap 1 Put the child restraint on the seat 2 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1379321 3 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1379324 4 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 1
55. are out of range of the transmitters for more than three minutes If you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle the headphones will lose the audio signal The headphones will automatically turn off after four hours of continuous use To adjust the volume on the headphones use the volume control located on the right side For optimal audio performance the head phones must be worn correctly The sym bol L Left will appear on the upper left side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the left ear The symbol R Right will appear on the upper right side above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear If the remote control becomes lost or dam aged a new universal remote control can be purchased If this happens make sure the universal remote control uses a code set of Toshiba CAUTION Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by your warranty Keep the headphones stored in a cool dry place The foam ear pads attached to the head phones may become worn or damaged if they are not handled or stored properly If the foam ear pads do become damaged or worn out the pads can be replaced sepa rately from the headphone set It is not necessary to replace the complete head phone set The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be ordered in pairs See your dealer for more information Battery Replace
56. away However the range may be less while the vehicle is running As a result you may need to be closer to your vehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter Refer to Remote Keyless Entry RKE System in this section Remote Keyless Entry with Remote Start 1686604 Remote Keyless Entry without Remote Start 1686606 The following functions may be available if your vehicle has the RKE system FEATURES AND CONTROLS Remote Vehicle Start If your vehicle has this feature it may be started from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter See Remote Vehicle Start following for more detailed informa tion Lock Press the lock button to lock the doors and liftgate If enabled through the Driver Infor mation Center DIC the parking lamps will flash once to indicate locking has occurred If enabled through the DIC the horn will chirp when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous press of the lock button Refer to DIC Vehicle Personalization in Driver Information Center DIC in the Instru ment Panel section for additional informa tion Pressing the lock button may arm the content theft deterrent system Refer to Content Theft Deterrent in this section gd Unlock Press the unlock button to unlock the driver s door If the button is
57. been associated with the use of alcohol with more than 300000 people injured Many adults by some estimates nearly half the adult population choose never to drink alcohol so they never drive after drinking For persons under 21 it is against the law in every U S state to drink alcohol There are good medical psycho logical and developmental reasons for these laws The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive But what if people do How much is too much if someone plans to drive It is a lot less than many might think Although it depends on each person and situation here is some general information on the problem The Blood Alcohol Concentration BAC of someone who is drinking depends upon four things The amount of alcohol consumed The drinker s body weight The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol According to the American Medical Associ ation a 180 Ibs 82 kg person who drinks three 12 ounce 355 ml bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC of about 0 06 percent The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce 120 ml glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1 2 ounces 45 ml of liquors like whiskey gin or vodka 1527211 It is the amount of alcohol that counts For exampl
58. button for the automatic dimming feature and compass Press the far left button located below the mirror face for up to four seconds to turn the fea ture on and off A light on the mirror will be lit while the feature is turned on Compass Operation Press the on off button once to turn the compass on or off There is a compass display in the window in the upper right corner of the mirror face The compass displays a maximum of two characters For example NE is displayed for north east Compass Calibration Press and hold the on off button down for nine seconds to activate the compass cali bration mode CAL will be displayed in the compass window on the mirror The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle in circles at 5 mph 8 km h or less until the display reads a direction FEATURES AND CONTROLS Compass Variance Compass variance is the difference between earth s magnetic north and true geographic north The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory It will be necessary to adjust the compass to com pensate for compass variance if you live outside zone eight Under certain circum stances such as during a long distance cross country trip it will be necessary to adjust for compass variance If not adjusted to account for compass variance your compass could give false readings To adjust for compass variance do the fol lowing 1 Find your current location and variance zone number on the
59. child restraint never put a child in a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag status indicator shows off and the airbag is off Here is why A WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Be sure the airbag is off before using a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat position Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the sys tem detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be transported in vehicles with a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint whenever possible If you need to secure a forward fac ing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passen ger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat If you need to secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat posi tion move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward facing child restraint Refer to Manual Seats in this section If your chi
60. control Refer to Radio with CD and DVD in this section for more information on the vehi cle s audio DVD system Before You Drive The RSE is designed for rear seat passen gers only The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE system may or may not work until the temperature is within the operating range The operating range for the RSE 3 67 system is above 4 F 20 C or below 140 F 60 C If the temperature of your vehicle is outside of this range heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within the operating range of the RSE sys tem Parental Conirol The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature depending on which radio you have The Parental Control feature will turn off the video screen This feature also disables all button operations from the remote control This feature can be used to gain the attention of the rear passengers that are using headphones To enable Parental Control press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds If on the radio and video screen will turn off If a DVD and or CD is playing it will be stopped A padlock icon or a text message may be displayed on the radio display depending on which radio you have while Parental Control is on The radio can be turned back on with a single press of the power button and used nor mally but the RSE s
61. cooling sys tem Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year Inspect wiper blades Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Inspect restraint system com ponents Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buck les latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance 6 4 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Service Instruction Maintenance Maintenance II Lubricate body components e Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assemblies secondary latches pivots spring anchor and release pawl hood and door hinges rear folding seats and liftgate hinges More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed t
62. device continues playing so you might want to stop it or power it off DVD CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this but ton again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is con nected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available Refer to Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment System in this section for more information Using an MP3 Radio with Single CD Player MP3 CD R or CD RW Disc The radio plays files that were recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates 32 kbps 40 kbps 56 kbps 64 kbps 80 kbps 96 kbps 112 kbps 128 kbps 160 kbps 192 kbps 224 kbps 256 kbps and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate Song title artist name and album are available for display by the radio when r
63. device is connected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available Refer to Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment System in this section for more information 5 Power Press this knob to turn the radio on or off Turn this knob clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease the volume Press and hold the knob for more than two seconds to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system and to start the parental control feature Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the remote con trol A lock symbol appears next to the clock display The parental control feature remains on until this button is pressed and held for more than two seconds again or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle 44 Tune Turn this knob to change tracks on a CD or DVD to manually tune a radio station or to change clock or date settings while in the clock or date setting mode See the infor mation given earlier in this section specific to the radio CD and the DVD Also refer to Setting the Time in the index for set ting the clock and date K SEEK Previous Track Chapter Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press this but ton again to go to the previo
64. display The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled refer to Care of Your CDs and DVDs in this section for more information If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD Do not add any label to a CD It could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen CAUTION If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section
65. do this Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt but the shoulder part is behind the child If the child wears the belt in this way in a crash the child might slide under the belt The belt s force would then be applied right on the child s abdo men That could cause serious or fatal injuries 1379303 Wherever the child sits the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the child s thighs This applies belt force to the child s pelvic bones in a crash Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection This includes infants and all other children Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need for everyone to use safety restraints In fact the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle WARNING Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles they should have the protection provided by appropriate restraints Young children should not use the vehicle s adult safety belts alone unless there is no other choice Instead they need to u
66. driving trips should turn the light off Have you recently changed brands of fuel If so be sure to fuel your vehicle with qual ity fuel Refer to Gasoline Octane in Fuel in the Service and Appearance Care section Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed You may notice this as stalling after start up stalling when you put the vehicle into gear misfiring hesitation on 3 22 INSTRUMENT PANEL acceleration or stumbling on acceleration These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on If you experience one or more of these conditions change the fuel brand you use It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off If none of the above steps have made the light turn off your dealer can check the vehicle Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state provincial and local govern ments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Here are some things you need to know to help your vehicle pass an inspection Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on or no
67. everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates then get fresh air by opening a window or a door If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deploy ment you should seek medical atten tion Your vehicle has a feature that may auto matically unlock the doors turn the interior lamps on and flash the hazard warning flashers when the airbags inflate You can lock the doors again turn the interior lamps off and turn off the hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features 1 38 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag windshields are broken by vehi cle deformation Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger airbag Airbags are designed to inflate only once After an airbag inflates you will need some new parts for your airbag system If you do not get them the air bag system will not be there to help pro tect you in another crash A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records infor mation after a crash Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag system Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly
68. flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter 3 37 NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is dis played on the DIC to select it DELAY LOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not the locking of the vehicle s doors will be delayed The locking of the vehicle s doors is delayed for up to 10 seconds after a power door lock switch is pressed when a door is open or after the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed while a door is open The key must be out of the ignition for this feature to work Refer to Delayed Locking in Doors and Locks in the Features and Controls section for more information Press the vehicle information button until DELAY LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle s doors ON default The locking of the vehicle s doors will be delayed by 10 seconds after a power door lock switch is pressed when a door is open or the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed while a door is open NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button w
69. ignition to RUN This light will also come on when one or more of your tires are significantly underin flated A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC mes sage will accompany the light Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to do so If underinflated inflate to the proper pressure Refer to Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section for more information This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn on solid if a problem is detected with the Tire Pressure Monitor system Refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section for more information Malfunction Indicator Lamp Check Engine Light 805353 Your vehicle has a computer which moni tors operation of the fuel ignition and emission control systems This system is called OBD II On Board Diagnostics Second Generation and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle helping to produce a cleaner environment The check engine light comes on to indi cate that there is a problem and service is required Malfunctions often will be indi cated by the system before any problem is apparent This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle This system is also designed to assist your service techni cian in correctly diagnosing any malfunc tion CAUTION If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on after awhile the emis si
70. immedi ately 2 19 Running the Engine While Parked It is better not to park with the engine run ning But if you ever have to here are some things to know WARNING Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dan gerous exhaust into your vehicle Refer to the earlier caution under Engine Exhaust in this section Also idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide CO into your vehicle even if the climate con trol fan is at the highest setting One place this can happen is a garage Exhaust with come in eas ily NEVER park in a garage with the engine running Another closed in place can be a bliz zard Refer to Winter Driving in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehi cle section WARNING It be dangerous get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not move Refer to Shifting Into Park P in this section If you are parking on a
71. in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled refer to Care of Your CDs and DVDs in this section for more information If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD INSTRUMENT PANEL Do not add any label to a CD It could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen CAUTION If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section EJECT Press the CD eject button to eject the CD If the CD is not removed after several sec onds the CD automatically pulls back into the player 44 Tune Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD currently playing K SEEK Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than ten sec onds have
72. is no apparent damage try a known good CD CAUTION If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris 3 63 Do not add any label to a CD It could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen If an error displays see CD Messages later in this section A CD Eject Press and release the CD eject button to eject the CD R that is currently playing in the bottom slot A beep sounds and Eject ing Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R can be removed If the CD R is not removed after several seconds the CD R automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject amp DVD Eject Press and release the DVD eject button to eject the CD R that is currently playing in the top slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displa
73. is not If your tires do not have enough air under inflation you can get the following Too much flexing Too much heat Tire overloading Premature or irregular wear Poor handling Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air over inflation you can get the following Unusual wear Poor handling Rough ride Needless damage from road haz ards A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar This label shows your vehicle s orig inal equipment tires and the correct infla tion pressures for your tires when they are cold The recommended cold tire inflation pressure shown on the label is the mini mum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle s maximum load car rying capacity For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry and an example of the Tire and Loading Infor mation label refer to Loading Your Vehi SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE cle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle sec tion How you load your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort Never load your vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry When to Check Check your tires once a month or more Do not forget to check the compact spare tire it should be at 60 psi 420 kPa For addi tional information regarding the compact spare tire refer to Compact Spare Tire in this section H
74. matching process is outlined below 1 Set the parking brake 2 Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off 3 Using the DIC press the vehicle infor mation button until the TIRE LOCA TIONS PRESS TO LEARN message displays 4 Press the set reset button to allow the system to learn the tire positions The horn will sound twice to indicate the receiver is ready and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays 5 32 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE The TPMS system is ready for the sen sor matching process to begin 5 Start with the driver side front tire 6 Remove the valve cap from the tire s valve stem Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure for five seconds or until a horn chirp sounds The horn chirp which may take up to 30 seconds to sound confirms that the sensor identifi cation code has been matched to the tire wheel position To decrease the tire s air pressure use the pointed end of the valve cap a pencil style air pres sure gage or a key 7 Proceed to the passenger side front tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 8 Proceed to the passenger side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 9 Proceed to the driver side rear tire and repeat the procedure in Step 6 10 After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the driver side rear tire the tire learning process ends Turn the ignition switch to LOCK 11 Set all four tires to the recommended a
75. motor to cool down When the engine starts let go of the key and accelerator If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again do the same thing This clears the extra gasoline from the engine Do not race the engine immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transaxle gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all mov ing parts CAUTION Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle If you add electrical parts or accessories you could change the way the engine operates Before adding electrical equipment check with your dealer If you do not your engine might not perform properly Any resulting dam age would not be covered by your vehicle s warranty Engine Coolant Heater If your vehicle has this feature in very cold weather 0 F 18 C or colder the engine coolant heater can help You will get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up Usually the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle At temperatures above 32 F 0 C use of the coolant heater is not required Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater when the temperature is at or above 0 F 18 C as noted on the cord To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1 Turn off the engine 2 Open the hood and unwrap the electri cal cord The cord is located o
76. must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equip ment At times you may notice a decrease in range This is normal for any remote key less entry system If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work try this Check the distance You may be too far from your vehicle You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather Check the location Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal Take a few steps to the left or right hold the transmitter higher and try again Check to determine if battery replace ment or resynchronization is necessary Refer to Battery Replacement and Resynchronization under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation in this section f you are still having trouble see your dealer or a qualified technician for ser vice Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation The vehicle s doors can be locked and unlocked from about 3 feet 1 m up to 65 feet 20 m away with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter If your vehicle has the remote start feature you can also start your vehicle with the RKE transmitter Your RKE transmitter with the remote start button provides an increased range of 195 feet 60 m
77. not add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first Some electrical equip ment can damage your vehicle and the damage would not be covered by your warranty Some add on electri cal equipment can keep other compo nents from working as they should Add on equipment can drain your vehicle s battery even if your vehicle is not operat ing Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle refer to Servicing Your Air bag Equipped Vehicle in Airbag System in the Seats and Restraint Systems sec tion Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit breaker and a fuse If the motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice the wiper will stop until the motor cools If the overload is caused by some electrical problem have it fixed Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the power seats When the current load is too heavy the circuit breaker opens and closes protecting the circuit until the prob lem is fixed Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are pro tected from short circuits by fuses and cir cuit breakers This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems Your vehicle has an underhood fuse block and an instrument panel fuse block To identify and check fuses circuit break ers and relays ref
78. on the RKE trans mitter LIGHTS ONLY The exterior lamps will flash when you press the lock button on the RKE trans mitter HORN ONLY The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmit ter HORN amp LIGHTS default The exterior lamps will flash when you 3 36 INSTRUMENT PANEL press the lock button on the RKE trans mitter and the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again within five seconds of the previous command NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is dis played on the DIC to select it REMOTE UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open Refer to Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation in Keys in the Features and Controls section for more information Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE UNLOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings LIGHTS OFF The exterior lamps will not flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter LIGHTS ON default The exterior lamps will
79. or a small child in a forward facing child restraint or booster seat is detected Refer to Passen ger Sensing System in this section and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section for more information on this including important safety information A label on your sun visor says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys 1 31 A WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you need to secure a forward fac ing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passen ger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing
80. parts If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job have it repaired Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced Also look for any opened or broken airbag coverings and have them repaired or replaced The airbag system does not need regular maintenance 6 9 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Service Instruction Maintenance Lubricate all key lock cylinders hood latch assemblies secondary latches pivots spring anchor and release pawl hood and door hinges rear folding seats and lift gate hinges Lubricate body components e More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environ ment such as winter road salt Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Inspect passenger compart Replace the air filter if necessary s f you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement ment air filter more often e Check system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Inspect throttle system Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear 6 10 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Additional Required Services For CANADA The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated kilometers shown for each item Additional required servi
81. remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors The first time a remote unlock command is received three flashes will be seen and three horn chirps heard to indicate an alarm condition has occurred since last arming Disarming with Your Key The alarm system will disarm when you use your key to unlock the doors or insert your key in ignition and turn it from the LOCK position PASS Key The PASS Key system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Com munications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equip ment PASS Key9 11 uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle PASS Key9 H Operation Your vehicle has PASS Key 1 Person alized Automotive Security System
82. restraint If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehi cle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this hap pens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle if one is available and check with your dealer 1 33 To remove the child restraint if the top tether is attached to the top tether anchor disconnect it Unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger Airbag System Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a frontal airbag for the right front passenger Your vehicle also has roof mounted rollover airbags designed for either side impact or rollover deployment Roof mounted rollover airbags are avail able for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver and for the right front passenger and the passen ger seated directly behind that passenger For roof mounted rollover airbags the word AIRBAG will appear along the head liner or trim Also if your vehicle has a third row p
83. section 6 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Service Instruction Maintenance Inspect engine air cleaner fil ter If necessary replace filter Refer to Engine Air Cleaner Filter in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section If you drive regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change Inspect suspension and steer ing components Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear Inspect power steering cables for proper hook up binding cracks chafing etc if equipped Inspect engine cooling sys tem Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked swollen or deteriorated Inspect all pipes fittings and clamps replace parts as needed To help ensure proper operation a pressure test of the cooling system and pres sure cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year Inspect wiper blades Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield Inspect restraint system com ponents Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts buckles latch plates retractors and anchorages are working properly Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
84. serviced by your dealer immedi ately Refer to Airbag Readiness Light in this section for more information SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE If your vehicle has the All Wheel Drive AWD system this message displays along with the service all wheel drive light if a problem occurs with this system Refer to Service All Wheel Drive Light in this section If this message appears stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle Restart the vehicle and check for the mes sage on the DIC display If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving the AWD system needs ser vice See your dealer 3 33 SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYS TEM This message displays when there is a problem with the generator and battery charging systems Driving with this prob lem could drain the vehicle s battery Turn off all unnecessary accessories Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so Have the electrical system checked by your dealer immediately Connecting a battery charger to your vehi cle while the ignition is in any position other than LOCK may cause this message to appear If you need to charge your vehi cle make sure that the key is in LOCK or out of the ignition during charging SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays and a chime sounds when the brake fluid level is low The brake system warning light also appears on the instrument panel cluster when this message appears on the DIC Refer to
85. should fit against your body 1697414 Answer The lap belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way A WARNING You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose In a crash you could slide under the lap belt and apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touch ing the thighs 1 12 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Question What is wrong with this Question What is wrong with this Question What is wrong with this GL RR a 805942 805947 805951 Answer Answer Answer The belt is buckled in the wrong place The shoulder belt is worn under the arm It The belt is twisted across the body should be worn over the shoulder at all A WARNING You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this In a crash the belt would go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at the pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you 1 13 times A WARNING You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm In a crash your body would move too far forward which would increase the chance of head and neck injury Also
86. tapping the back of the cap with the wheel wrench 3 If your vehicle has Third Row Seating fold down the seat backs Refer to Third Row Seat in Rear Seats in the Seats and Restraint Systems section 4 Put the flat tire in the tire storage bag and place it the rear storage area If your vehicle has Third Row Seating place the tire with the valve stem point ing toward the front of the vehicle If your vehicle does not have Third Row Seating place the tire with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE 1829965 5 Pull the cable A through the door striker C and the center of the wheel 812750 6 Hook the cable A onto the outside of the liftgate hinges B 5 46 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE 7 Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure 1829968 8 Make sure the metal tube is center at the striker Push the tube towards the front of the vehicle 9 Close the liftgate 10 If your vehicle has Third Row Seating return the third row seat to their upright position Refer to Third Row Seat in Rear Seats in the Seats and Restraint Systems section Compact Spare Tire Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when the vehicle was new it can lose air after a time Check the inflation pressure regularly It should be 60 psi 420 kPa After installing the comp
87. the MP3 files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc The CD player lower slot is able to read and play a maximum combination of 512 files and folders The DVD player upper slot is able to read 255 folders 15 playl ists and 40 sessions Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Orga nize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can sup port up to eight subfolders deep how ever keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the com plexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a m3u wpl or pls extension as other file extensions may not work Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playl ist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists may cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions If you wish to play a large number of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off Finalize the audio disc before you burn it Trying to add music to an existing disc may cause the disc not to function in the pla
88. the belt would apply too much force to the ribs which are not as strong as shoulder bones You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen WARNING You be seriously injured by a twisted belt In a crash you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces If a belt is twisted make it straight so it can work properly or ask your dealer to fix it SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1378915 To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle The belt should go back out of the way Before you close the door be sure the belt is out of the way If you slam the door on it you can damage both the belt and your vehicle Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment Before you begin to drive move the shoul der belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you Adjust the height so that the shoulder por tion of the belt is centered on your shoul der The belt should be away from your face and neck but not falling off your shoulder Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash 1507374 To move it up or down squeeze the release buttons A together and move the height adjuster to the desired position After you move the height adjuster to where you want it try to move it up or down without squeezing the release but tons to make sure it has locked into posi tion Safety Belt Use During
89. the desired artist is dis played To change from playback by artist to play back by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen Now the album name is displayed on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begin to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD R and begins playing MP3 files from that album To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or a DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this but ton again and the system automatically INSTRUMENT PANEL searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a porta ble audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate connected the DVD CD AUX button
90. the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash Refer to Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment in this section 1378907 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder belt It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants 809246 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply force at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash Question What is wrong with this SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Question What is wrong with this 4 y S 2222 DB 810723 Answer The shoulder belt is too loose It will not give nearly as much protection this way A WARNING You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt
91. the following 1 Insert the key into the lock above the rear door security lock label and turn it to the horizontal position 2 Close the door 3 Repeat the steps for the other rear door To open a rear door while the security lock is on do the following 1 Unlock the door using the remote key less entry transmitter the front door power lock switch or by lifting the rear door manual lock 2 Open the door from the outside FEATURES AND CONTROLS To cancel the rear door security lock do the following 1 Unlock the door and open it from the outside 2 Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door security lock label and turn it to the vertical position 3 Repeat the steps for the other lock Lockout Protection If you press the power door lock switch when the key is in the ignition and any door is open all the doors will lock and only the driver s door will unlock Be sure to remove the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle If the keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the doors and the key is in the ignition a chime will sound three times All passen ger doors will lock but the driver s door will remain unlocked 2 6 FEATURES AND CONTROLS Liftgate A WARNING It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or liftglass open because car bon monoxide CO gas can come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconscious ness and even death If yo
92. the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the sys tem detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint never put a child in a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag status indicator shows off and the airbag is off Here is why A WARNING Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the sys tem detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be trans ported in vehicles with a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint whenever possible If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator it means that the right front passenger s frontal air bag is enabled may inflate A WARNING If the on indicator comes on when you have a rear facing child restraint installed in the right front passen ger s seat it mean
93. the third row rear seating area If you want to secure a child restraint in a rear seating position in the third row be sure to study the instructions that came with your child restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your seat properly If the length of the seat cushion is too short for your child restraint and you cannot install it in accordance with the child restraint manufacturers instructions secure it in the second row If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the rear seat review the follow ing illustrations NOTE Depending on where you place the child restraint or the size of the child restraint you may not be able to access certain safety belt assemblies for additional pas sengers or LATCH anchors for child restraints For more information about where to place the child restraint refer to Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations in this section SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Configurations for Use of Two Child Restraints A JL 0 A 1507695 A Child restraint using LATCH B Occupant prohibited 1 24 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Configurations for Use of Three 1507697 1507698 A Occupant prohibited A Child restraint using LATCH B Child restraint using LATCH Child Restraints 4t LO 7 B No occupant recommended 1507710 C Child restraint or occupant using safety Child restraint or occupant using safet
94. theft deterrent system PASS Key Ill is a pas sive theft deterrent system This means you do not have to do anything special to arm or disarm the system It works when you transition the key to RUN ACC or START from the LOCK position When the PASS Key 11 system senses that someone is using the wrong key it prevents the vehicle from starting Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes If the engine does not start and the secu rity light on the instrument panel comes on when trying to start the vehicle the key may have a damaged transponder Turn the ignition off and try again If the engine still does not start and the key appears to be undamaged try another ignition key At this time you may also want to check the fuse refer to Fuses and Circuit Breakers in Electrical System in the Service and Appearance Care sec tion If the engine still does not start with the other key your vehicle needs service If your vehicle does start the first key may be faulty See your dealer who can service the PASS Key 111 to have a new key made In an emergency contact Roadside Assistance FEATURES AND CONTROLS It is possible for the PASS Key 111 decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key Up to nine addi tional keys may be programmed for the vehicle The following procedure is for pro gramming additi
95. to 8000 miles 8000 to 13000 km Refer to Tire Inspection and Rotation in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section and At Least Once a Month in this section Inspect brake system Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up bind ing leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect drum brake linings shoes for wear or cracks if equipped Inspect other brake parts including drums wheel cylinders cali pers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any needed addi tional services Refer to Additional Required Services except in this section 6 3 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Service Instruction Maintenance Maintenance II Inspect engine air cleaner fil ter If necessary replace filter Refer to Engine Air Cleaner Filter in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section If you drive regularly under dusty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change Inspect suspension and steer ing components Visually inspect front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged loose or missing parts signs of wear Inspect power steering cables for proper hook up binding cracks chafing etc if equipped Inspect engine
96. top of the thighs It should never be worn over the abdomen which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS According to accident statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions In a crash children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up or can be thrown out of the vehicle Older children need to use safety belts properly WARNING Never do this Here two children are wearing the same belt The belt cannot properly spread the impact forces In a crash the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured A belt must be used by only one person at a time 1 18 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1379302 Question What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child s face or neck Answer If the child is sitting in a seat next to a win dow move the child toward the center of the vehicle Also refer to Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides in this section If the child is sitting in the center rear seat passenger position move the child toward the safety belt buckle In either case be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child s shoulder so that in a crash the child s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide 1 19 WARNING Never
97. vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions you may want to shift into SECOND 2 A higher gear and light application of the gas pedal may allow you to gain more traction on slippery surfaces With the MANUAL SHIFT MODE the vehi cle can accelerate from a stop in SECOND 2 1 Move the shift lever from DRIVE D into the MANUAL SHIFT MODE M position 2 With the vehicle stopped press the plus paddle forward to select SEC OND 2 The vehicle will start from a stop position in SECOND 2 3 Once the vehicle is moving select the desired drive gear 2 17 Parking Brake 1722713 The parking brake lever is located to the right of the driver s seat To set the parking brake hold the brake pedal down and pull up on the parking brake lever If the ignition is on the brake system warning light will come on To release the parking brake hold the brake pedal down Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press the release button Hold the release button in as you move the brake lever all the way down Make sure to release the parking brake before driving the vehicle If the parking brake is applied and the vehi cle is moving at least 4 mph 6 km h a chime will activate to remind you to release the parking brake CAUTION Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts Verify that the parkin
98. where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90 F 32 C or higher In hilly or mountainous terrain When doing frequent trailer tow ing Uses such as found in taxi police or delivery service Change automatic transaxle fluid normal service Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service 6 6 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Service Instruction Miles Kilometers 25000 40000 50000 80000 75000 120000 100000 160000 125000 200000 150000 240000 Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Ser vice Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer perform this service e Refer to Engine Coolant in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pres sure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE For CANADA Scheduled Maintenance Service Instruction Maintenance Change engine oil and filter Change engine oil and filter if the light message has not c
99. with a BAC level of 0 06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision Ata BAC level of 0 10 percent the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater at a level of 0 15 percent the chance is 25 times greater The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that I will be careful is not the right answer What if there is an emer gency a need to take sudden action as when a child darts into the street A per son with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision 4 2 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE There is something else about drinking and driving that many people do not know Medical research shows that alcohol in a person s system can make crash injuries worse especially injuries to the brain spi nal cord or heart This means that when anyone who has been drinking driver or passenger is in a crash that person s chance of being killed or permanently dis abled is higher than if the person had not been drinking A WARNING Drinking and then driving is very dan gerous Your reflexes perceptions attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking Please do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking Ride home in a cab or if you a
100. with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is com bined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illu minated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illumi nated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction tell tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly When a low tire pressure condition is detected the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressure warning symbol on the instru ment panel cluster and at the same time a message to check the pressure in a spe cific tire will appear on the Driver Informa tion Center DIC display The low tire pressure warning symbol on the instru ment panel cluster and the check tire pres sure message will appear at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the cor rect inflation pressure Using the DIC tire pressure le
101. 379355 5 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using a forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt 6 If your child restraint has a top tether and the position that you are using has a top tether anchor attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor Refer to the instructions that came with the child restraint and to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH in this section 7 Push and pull the child restraint in dif ferent directions to be sure it is secure To remove the child restraint just unbuckle the vehicle s safety belt and let it go back all the way The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger 1 30 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position Your vehicle has a right front passenger s airbag A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward facing child restraint Refer to Where to Put the Restraint in this section In addition your vehicle has a passenger sensing system The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag when an infant in a rear facing infant seat
102. ALL WHEEL DRIVE message in the Driver Information Center DIC will come on and stay on to indicate that there may be a problem with the drive system and service is required Refer to All Wheel Drive AWD System in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehi cle in the Driving Your Vehicle section 3 25 and DIC Warnings and Messages in this section for more information All Wheel Drive Disabled Light 1710823 This light will come on when the rear drive system is overheating An ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF message will appear in the Driver Information Center DIC too This light will turn off when the rear drive system cools down If this light stays on for a while you need to reset the light To reset the light turn the ignition off and then back on again If the light stays on see your dealer right away Refer to All Wheel Drive in the Service and Appearance Care section and DIC Warnings and Messages in this section for more information Gate Ajar Light 1326999 If this light comes on your liftgate is not completely closed Driving with the liftgate open can cause carbon monoxide CO to enter the vehicle Refer to Engine Exhaust in Starting and Operating Your Vehicle in the Features and Controls section for more information Door Ajar Light 1734979 This light will come on when a door is ajar Do not drive with a door ajar Service V
103. Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 42 Additional Required Services 6 11 Additional Required Services except CANADA 6 6 EE 5 2 Add On Electrical Equipment eren 5 53 Airbag Readiness Light eere 3 16 Airbag System dte ie nee 1 33 All Wheel Drive eeeeeeeeeneee neret 5 22 All Wheel Drive AWD System 4 6 All Wheel Drive Disabled Light 3 25 Aluminum Wheels eese nennen 5 50 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 4 4 Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 3 20 Appearance Care 1 nece rertitenreet Assist a lle ee At Each Fuel Fill essent At Least Once a Month esee At Least Once a Year eese nnn Audio Steering Wheel Controls sess Audio System s Automatic Climate Control System Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass 2 20 Automatic Transaxle Fluid eere 5 10 INDEX Automatic Transaxle Operation
104. CE AND APPEARANCE CARE If you have to add coolant more than four times a year have your dealer check your cooling system Engine Compartment Overview in this section for more information on location WARNING Engine Overheating There is a coolant temperature gage and a warning light on the instrument panel clus ter that indicate an overheated engine con dition Refer to Engine Coolant Temperature Gage and Engine Coolant CAUTION Turning the surge tank pressure cap If you use extra inhibitors and or additives in your vehicle s cooling system you could damage your vehi cle Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this man ual for the cooling system Refer to when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly Never turn the surge tank pressure cap even a little when the engine and radiator are hot Temperature Warning Light in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section for more infor mation If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine A WARNING Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly even if you just open the hood Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam com ing from it Turn it off and get every one away from the vehicle until it cools down Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood Recommended Fluids and
105. CLE 4 Reapply the regular brakes Then apply your parking brake and then shift to PARK P 5 Release the regular brakes When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking on a Hill 1 Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you do the following 1 Start your engine 2 Shift into a gear 3 Release the parking brake 2 Let up on the brake pedal 3 Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks 4 Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks Maintenance When Trailer Towing Your vehicle will need service more often when you are pulling a trailer See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid engine oil belts cooling system and brake system Each of these is covered in this manual and the Index will help you find them quickly If you are trailering itis a good idea to review these sections before you start your trip Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight 4 25 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE lag 5 1 d EE 5 2 Checking Things Under the Hood 5 5 All Wheel Drive eere nnne nnne nnne 5 22 Bulb Replacement seen nennen 5 23 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement 5 25 Tre S M Appearance Care Vehicle Identification
106. DINE 56 Fan 1 24 Mass Airflow Sensor 42 E Se 58 Passenger s Side Trailer 25 Airbag Display 43 SUL Ta cana SOR Turn THES Driver s Side Trailer 26 Spare 44 Spare 39 Stoplamp Turn Signal 27 Stoplamp 45 Front Rear Washer 60 Fan 3 28 Bl M Side Low 48 Rear Defogger 61 Fan 2 29 Driver s Side High Beam 49 Brake System 62 Fuel Pump 30 Battery Main 3 50 Battery Main 2 32 Spare 52 Daytime Running Lamps 33 Control Module 53 Fog Lamps 34 Transmission Control 54 Module Battery 35 Trailer Park Lamp Battery Men 36 Front Wiper 63 Electric Power Steering 5 56 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section for more information Capacities English Metric Application For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood See your dealer for more information Cooling System Front Only Climate Control System 12 7 qt 12 0L Front and Rear Climate Control System 13 1 qt 12 4L Fuel Tank 18 5 gal 70 0L Transaxle Fluid 4 1 qt 3 9L Wheel Nut Torque 100 Ib ft 140 All capacities are approximate When adding be sure to fill to the approximate le
107. E CARE Replacement Bulbs Bulb Exterior Lamp Number Back up Lamp 921 License Plate Lamp 168 Rear Turn Signal Stoplamp Sidemarker Tail 3057K lamp For replacement bulbs not listed here con tact your dealer 5 24 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking Refer to Scheduled Maintenance in Mainte nance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section for more information Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways For proper type and length refer to Nor mal Maintenance Replacement Parts in Maintenance Schedule in the Mainte nance Schedule section Here s how to replace the windshield wiper blades 1 Make sure the front wipers are turned off 2 Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the windshield 5 25 811525 3 Pull up the release clip located at the connecting point of the blade and the arm Then pull the blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it from the wiper arm 4 Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm until you hear the release clip click into place 5 Push the release clip from Step 3 down to secure the wiper blade into place Rear Window Wiper Blade Replacement To replace the rear window wiper blade do the following 1 Make sure that the rear wiper is off 2 Pull the w
108. EMS A WARNING If something is between an occupant and an airbag the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering And if your vehicle has roof mounted rollover airbags never secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing the rope or tie down through any door or window opening If you do the path of an inflating side impact airbag will be blocked The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear When Should an Airbag Inflate The drivers and right front passenger s frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes But they are designed to inflate only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold Deployment thresh olds take into account a variety of desired deployment and non deployment events and are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants Whether your frontal airbags will or should 1 37 deploy is not based on how fast your vehi cle is traveling It depends largely on what you hit the direction of the impact and how quickly your vehicle slows down In addition your vehicle has dual stage fronta
109. ID Radio ID label channel 0 If tuned to channel 0 this message alternates with the XMTM Radio eight digit radio ID label This label is needed to acti vate the service Unknown Radio ID not known If this message is received when tuned to channel 0 there should only be if hardware failure could be a receiver fault Consult with your dealer Check XM Receivr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer XM Not Available XM Not Available If this message does not clear within a short period of time the receiver could have a fault Consult with your dealer 3 66 INSTRUMENT PANEL Navigation Radio System Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system The navigation radio system has built in features intended to minimize driver dis traction Technology alone no matter how advanced can never replace your own judgment For complete information on your navigation radio system including tips on helping to reduce distractions while driving see the Navigation System Man ual Rear Seat Entertainment System Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment RSE system The RSE system works with the vehicle s audio sys tem The DVD player is part of the front radio The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player a video display screen audio video jacks two wireless head phones and a remote
110. It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year However the engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year or 10 months if operated in Canada and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer has trained service technicians who will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the system If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally you must service your vehicle within 3000 miles 5000 km since your last service Remember to reset the oil life sys tem whenever the oil is changed Refer to Engine Oil Life System in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section for informa tion on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system For ALL except CANADA When the change engine oil light and or CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message appears certain services checks and inspections are required Required ser vices are described in the following for Maintenance and Maintenance Il MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Generally it is recommended that your first service be Maintenance 1 your second service be Maintenance ll and that you alternate Maintenance and Maintenance thereafter However in some cases Maintenance may be required more often Maintenance Use Maintenance if the light message comes on within 10 months since th
111. L A WARNING If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle it means the airbag system may not be work ing properly The airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash or they could even inflate without a crash To help avoid injury to yourself or others have your vehicle serviced right away if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle The airbag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system Your instrument panel has a pas senger airbag status indicator 3 17 United States PASSENGER amp 2 1476572 Canada IN e 1476529 When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START the passenger airbag status indi cator will light ON and OFF or the symbol for on and off for several seconds as a system check Then after several more seconds the status indicator will light either ON or OFF or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger s frontal airbag There is a label on your sun visor that says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys WARNING Even though
112. LTS PEA E SYSTEM ee MOVE SEAT DO NOT INSTALL LAMPS 00 ENGINE eos 2 FULLY REAR FACING A Q COOLANT CAUSE REARWARD CHILD RESTRAINT FAN BURNS SECURE IN THIS SEATING HAZARD CHILD SEAT POSITION WARNING FLASHER COOLANT FUEL AVOID PULL BELT N ao DO NOT INSTALL A SPARKS OR lt FORWARD FACING FLAMES COMPLETELY DAYTIME ee THEN SECURE A CHILD RESTRAINT RUNNING ENGINE OL OWNER S CHILD SEAT IN THIS SEATING LAMPS PRESSURE MANUAL SPARK OR POSITION aM COULD power 1 DOOR LOCK FOG ANTI LOCK 6 SERVICE winpow 9 UNLOCK LAMPS BRAKES MANUAL 809119 0 3 0 4 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Frorit Se dls uuu T S 1 1 Rear Seals cee nies LE 1 6 Safety Bells nerneco petiere bec technics 1 9 Child Restraint 1 18 Airbag System niece eiie eerie 1 33 Restraint System Check eese 1 42 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Front Seats Manual Seats A WARNING You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving a 808318 Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock it Slide the seat to where you want it
113. Lubri cants in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section for more information The vehicle must be on a level surface When your engine is cold the coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line When your engine is warm the level should be at the COLD FILL line or a little higher Checking Coolant Adding Coolant If you need more coolant add the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture at the surge tank but only when the engine is cool A WARNING You can be burned if you spill cool ant on hot engine parts Coolant con tains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated the liquids in it can catch fire You or others could be badly burned Stop your engine if it overheats and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool Refer to Overheated Engine Protec tion Operating Mode in this section When replacing the pressure cap make for information on driving to a safe sure it is hand tight and fully seated place in an emergency 1631523 The surge tank is located on the driver s side of the engine compartment Refer to 5 12 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE CAUTION If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant your vehicle can be badly damaged The costly repairs would not be cov ered by your warranty
114. S After rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor the system must re learn the tire positions To re learn the tire positions refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section Refer to Tire Inspection and Rotation in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section and DIC Warn ings and Messages in this section for more information RELEARN REMOTE KEY This display allows you to match the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to your vehicle To match a RKE transmitter to your vehicle do the following 1 Make sure the vehicle is in PARK P 2 Press the vehicle information button until PRESS TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays 3 Press the set reset button The message REMOTE KEY LEARN ING ACTIVE will display 4 Press and hold the lock and unlock but tons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched 5 To match additional transmitters at this time repeat Step 3 Each vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it 6 To exit the programming mode you must cycle the key to LOCK Blank Display This display shows no information PERSONALIZATION This display allows you to personalize the feature settings on your vehicle Refer to DIC Vehicle Personalization in this sec tion for more information DIC Warnings and M
115. S sensors are missing or inoperable If the system detects a miss ing or inoperable sensor an error mes sage SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM will be shown on the DIC display If you have replaced a tire wheel assembly with out transferring the TPMS sensors the error message will be displayed Once you re install the TPMS sensors the error message should go off See your SUZUKI dealer for service if all TPMS sensors are installed and the error message comes on and stays on TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identifi cation code Any time you replace one or SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE more of the TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle s tires the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire wheel position The sensors are matched to the tire wheel positions in the following order driver side front tire passenger side front tire passenger side rear tire and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool See your SUZUKI dealer for service The TPMS sensors may also be matched to each tire wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire s air pressure When increasing the tire s pressure do not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the tire s sidewall You will have two minutes to match each tire and wheel position If it takes longer than two minutes to match any tire and wheel position the matching process stops and you will need to start over The TPMS
116. SELECT appears on the DIC dis play 3 Press the set reset button to enter the feature settings menu If the menu is not available FEATURE SETTINGS AVAILABLE IN PRK Park will display Before entering the menu make sure the vehicle is in PARK P Feature Settings Menu Items The following are personalization features that allow you to program settings to the vehicle DISPLAY ENGLISH This feature will only display if a language other than English has been set This fea ture allows you to change the language in which the DIC messages appear to English Press the vehicle information button until the PRESS TO DISPLAY ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to display all DIC mes sages in English DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the lan guage in which the DIC messages will appear Press the vehicle information button until DISPLAY LANGUAGE appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings ENGLISH default All messages will appear in English FRANCAIS French All messages will appear in French ESPANOL Spanish All messages will appear in Spanish NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is dis pl
117. Several seconds after the key is turned to RUN or START a chime will sound for sev eral seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt This would only occur if the passenger airbag is enabled Refer to Passenger Sensing System in Airbag System in the Seats and Restraint Systems section for more infor mation The passenger safety belt light will also come on and stay on for several sec onds then it will flash for several more 1468137 This chime and light will be repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion If the passenger s safety belt is buckled neither the chime nor the light will come on INSTRUMENT PANEL Airbag Readiness Light There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag s electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical prob lem The system check includes the airbag sensor the airbag modules the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module e FC 808322 This light will come on when you start your vehicle and it will flash for a few seconds Then the light should go out This means the system is ready If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving your airbag system may not work properly Have your vehicle ser viced right away 3 16 INSTRUMENT PANE
118. TION Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification Number EXAMPLE for some vehicles 60G152 The Vehicle Identification Number VIN may be found in the location shown in the above illustrations This number is used to register the vehicle It is also used to assist your dealer when ordering parts or refer ring to special service information 7 1 Engine Serial Number 60G128 The engine serial number is stamped on the cylinder block as shown in the above illustration Safety Certification Label Mro SUZUKI MOTOR CO LTD JAPAN GYWR GAWA m bey COLO TIRE PRESS TA CABLE FED PN STANDAROS z UATE OF MANUFACTURE amp AR amp RR 52D059 This label contains important safety related information about your vehicle The label is located on the driver s door lock pil lar Emission Compliance Label for U S A 60A412 The EPA emission compliance label is located under the hood It provides much of the information needed to perform an engine tune up on your vehicle Warranties The warranties covering your vehicle are explained in a separate New Vehicle War ranty Information booklet given to you at the time of sale Please read this booklet carefully so you can understand your rights and responsibilities For U S A The following warranties are provided with your vehicle New Vehicle Limite
119. TIRES PSI kPa LF RF Press the vehicle information button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI kPa LR RR If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the system while driving a message advising you to check the pres sure in a specific tire will appear in the dis play Refer to Inflation Tire Pressure in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section and DIC Warnings and Messages in this section for more infor mation If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a value there may be a problem with your vehicle If this consistently occurs see your dealer for service BATTERY Press the vehicle information button until BATTERY displays This display shows the current battery voltage If the voltage is low the display will show LOW If the volt age is high the display will show HIGH Your vehicle s charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery The battery voltage may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC This is normal Refer to Battery Warning Light in this section for more information If there is a problem with the battery charg ing system the DIC will display SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM Refer to SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYS TEM under DIC Warnings and Mes sages in this section Also refer to Electric Power Management in this sec tion for more information TIRE LOCATION
120. The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX Ibs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the amount equals 1400 Ibs and there will be five 150 Ib passengers in your vehi cle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ibs 5 Determine the combined weight of lug gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer the load from your trailer will be trans ferred to your vehicle Consult this man ual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity for your vehicle If your vehicle can tow a trailer refer to Towing a Trailer in this section for impor tant information on towing a trailer towing safety rules and trailering tips DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 eb iz db on 4 BE BB l B B 1273153 1273154 1273155 Item Descripion Total Item Descripion Total Item Descripion Total Maximum Vehicle Maxim
121. This is not an audio output do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack You can however con nect an external audio device such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD changer or cassette tape player etc to the auxiliary input jack for use as another Source for audio listening Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxil iary device while the vehicle is in park P Refer to Defensive Driving in Your Driv ing the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle for more information on driver distraction To use a portable audio player connect a 3 5 mm 1 8 inch cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack When a device is con nected press the radio CD AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers 5 Power Volume Turn this knob clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player You may need to do additional volume adjustments from the portable device if the volume does not go loud or soft enough BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing The por table audio device continues playing so you may want to stop it or turn it off CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when a por table audio device is playing Press this button again and the system begins playing audio from the connected portable audio player If a portable audio player is not co
122. This message will be displayed if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message will be displayed if no disc is present when the EJECT button is pressed on the radio DVD Distortion Video distortion may occur when operating cellular phones scanners CB radios Glo bal Position Systems GPS two way radios mobile fax or walkie talkies It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water 3 73 Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water Use care when directly touching or clean ing the screen as damage may result Theft Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK is designed to discourage theft of your vehicle s radio The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number VIN If the radio is moved to a different vehicle it does not operate and LOCKED displays With THEFTLOCK activated the radio cannot operate if stolen Audio Steering Wheel Controls 1673270 If your vehicle has audio steering wheel controls they may be differ depending on your vehicle s options Some audio con trols can be adjusted at the steering wheel They include the following V A Next Previous Press the u
123. This part is only for people of adult size Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children And there are different rules for smaller children and babies If a child will be riding in your vehicle refer to Older Children or Infants and Young Children in this section Follow those rules for everyone s protection First you will want to know which restraint Systems your vehicle has We will start with the driver position 1 11 Driver Position Lap Shoulder Belt The driver has a lap shoulder belt Here is how to wear it properly 1 Close and lock the door 2 Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight To see how see Seats in the Index 1378723 3 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 4 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure If the belt is not long enough refer to Safety Belt Extender 5 in this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height that is right for you Improper shoulder belt height adjust ment could reduce
124. Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the CD R currently playing KI SEEK Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 file if more than ten seconds have played Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multi ple times the player continues moving backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder INSTRUMENT PANEL gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder 4 REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse play back quickly within an MP3 file You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file appears on the dis play gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance play back quickly within an MP3 file You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file appears on the dis play RDM Random With random you can listen to files on the CD R in random rather than sequential order To use random press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play Q Music Navigator Use the m
125. act spare on the vehicle you should stop as soon as possi 5 47 ble and make sure the spare tire is cor rectly inflated The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph 105 km h for distances up to 3000 miles 5000 km so you can finish your trip and have the full size tire repaired or replaced where you want You must calibrate the tire inflation monitor system if your vehicle has this feature after installing or remov ing the compact spare Refer to Tire Pres sure Monitor System in this section The system may not work correctly when the compact spare is installed on the vehicle Of course it s best to replace the spare with a full size tire as soon as you can The spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again CAUTION When the compact spare is installed do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with guide rails The compact spare can get caught on the rails That can damage the tire and wheel and maybe other parts of your vehicle Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires They will not fit Keep the spare tire and its wheel together CAUTION Tire chains will not fit your compact spare Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too Do not use tire chains on your compact spare Appearance Care Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle Your vehicle
126. affic flow Once you are on the freeway adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevail ing rate if it is slower Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass Before changing lanes check your mirrors Then use your turn signal Just before you leave the lane glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in your blind spot Once you are moving on the freeway make certain you allow a reasonable fol lowing distance Expect to move slightly slower at night When you want to leave the freeway move to the proper lane well in advance If you miss your exit do not under any circum stances stop and back up Drive on to the next exit The exit ramp can be curved sometimes quite sharply The exit speed is usually posted Reduce your speed according to your speedometer not to your sense of motion After driving for any distance at higher speeds you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are Before Leaving on a Long Trip Make sure you are ready Try to be well rested If you must start when you are not fresh such as after a day s work do not plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in Is your vehicle ready for a long trip If you keep it serviced and maintained it is ready to go If it needs service have it done before starting out Of course you will find experienced an
127. age to these parts Make sure when securing unused safety belts behind the child restraint that there is no contact between the child restraint or the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle s safety belt assembly Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts secured may cause dam age to the safety belt or the seat When removing the child restraint always remember to return the safety belts to their normal stowed position before folding the rear seat SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1252139 A Passengers side rear seat lower anchors B Center rear seat lower anchors C Drivers side rear seat lower anchors Make sure to attach the child restraint at the proper anchor location This system is designed to make installa tion of child restraints easier When using lower anchors do not use the vehicle s safety belts Instead use the vehicle s anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether 1 Attach and tighten the lower attach ments to the lower anchors If the child restraint does not have lower attach ments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors secure 1 28 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual 1 Find the lower anchors for desired s
128. aints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or American Suzuki Motor Corp To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 400 Sev enth Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov To contact American Suzuki owners in the continental United States can call toll free 1 800 934 0934 or write to American Suzuki Motor Corporation Automotive Customer Relations 3251 East Imperial Highway Brea CA 92821 6795 For owners outside the continental United States please refer to the dis tributors address listed in your War ranty Information booklet For vehicles registered for use and principally operated in Canada please contact Suzuki Canada Inc at 1 905 889 2677 extension 2254 or write to Suzuki Canada Inc Customer Relations 100 East Beaver Creek Road Richmond Hill On L4B 1J6 GENERAL INFORMATION GENERAL INFORMATION INDEX A Accessories and Modifications Accessory Power Outlet s eere Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle 5 1 Adding Equipment to Your
129. airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front pas senger s seat When the passenger sens ing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active For some children who have outgrown child restraints and for very small adults the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the right front passenger s fron tal airbag depending upon the person s seating posture and body build Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt prop erly whether or not there is an airbag for that person 1 41 If a person of adult size is sitting in the right front passengers seat but the off indicator is lit it could be because that per son is not sitting properly in the seat If this happens turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully upright position then sit upright in the seat centered on the seat cushion with the per son s legs comfortably extended Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and then enable the passenger s airbag 849515 A WARNING If the airbag readiness light in the instrument panel cluster ever comes on and stays on it means that some thing may be wrong with the airbag system If this ever happens have the
130. ake any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch If you do remember to seal the holes when you remove the hitch If you do not seal them deadly carbon monoxide CO from your exhaust can get into your vehicle Refer to Engine Exhaust in Starting and Operating Your Vehicle in the Features and Controls section Dirt and water can too Safety Chains You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from con tacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manu facturer or by the trailer manufacturer Fol low the manufacturers recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground Trailer Brakes If your trailer weighs more than 1000 Ibs 450 kg loaded then it needs its own brakes and they must be adequate Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you will be able to install adjust and maintain them properly 4 23 Because your vehicle has anti lock brakes do not try to tap into your vehicle s brake system If you do both brake systems will not work well or at all Driving with a Trailer A WARNING If you have the liftgate open and you pull a t
131. akes power windows power seats and air conditioning Aspect Ratio The relationship of a tire s height to its width Belt A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim Bias Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Cold Tire Pressure The amount of air pressure in a tire mea sured in pounds per square inch psi or SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE kilopascals kPa before a tire has built up heat from driving Refer to Inflation Tire Pressure in this section Curb Weight This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel oil and coolant but without passengers and cargo DOT Markings A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation DOT motor vehicle safety standards The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number TIN an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufac turer production plant brand and date of production GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Refer to Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the
132. akes start your vehicle and trailer mov ing and then apply the trailer brake control ler by hand to be sure the brakes are working This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time During your trip check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still work ing Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns Passing You will need more passing distance up ahead when you are towing a trailer And because you are a good deal longer you will need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand Then to move the trailer to the left just move that hand to the left To move the trailer to the right move your hand to the right Always back up slowly and if possible have someone guide you Making Turns CAUTION Making very sharp turns while traile ring could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle Your vehi cle could be damaged Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering When you are turning with a trailer make wider turns than normal Do this so your trailer will not strike soft shoulders curbs road signs trees or other objects Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers S
133. al for additional advice and equipment recommendations s your vehicle ready to be towed Just as you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip you ll want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed Refer to Before Leaving on a Long Trip in this section Dinghy Towing CAUTION Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels or even only two wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain or transmission compo nents Towing a front wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain or transmission components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle with two or four wheels on the ground or a front wheel drive vehicle if all four wheels will be on the ground If you have an all wheel drive vehicle or a front wheel drive vehicle it was not designed to be towed with all of its wheels on the ground It can be towed with car carrier equipment If you have a front DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE wheel drive vehicle it can be towed with its two front wheels off the ground See Dolly Towing following Dolly Towing If you have a front wheel drive vehicle it can be towed with the two front wheels off the ground To dolly tow your vehicle do the following 1 Put the front wheels on a dolly 2 Put the vehicle in PARK P 3 Set the parking brake and then remove the key 4 Clamp the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing 5 Rel
134. anged That would be the tire on the other side at the opposite end of the vehicle When your vehicle has a flat tire use the following example as a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE 809231 The following information will tell you next how to use the jack and change a tire Removing the Spare Tire and Tools To access the tools do the following 1 Locate the jack and wheel wrench which are located on the passengers side of the rear cargo area behind an access door Pull out the access door to reach them 5 38 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE a SS lt n NINA 1399885 2 Remove the wing bolt on the jack and then remove it 3 Remove the hook and loop fastener straps holding the bag containing the wheel wrench Remove the wheel wrench from the bag The following instructions explain how to remove the underbody mounted spare underneath your vehicle CAUTION If you remove or restow a tire from to the storage position under the vehi cle while it is supported by a jack you could damage the tire and or your vehicle Always remove or restow a tire when the vehicle is on the ground 5 39 1 Open the liftgate Refer to Liftgate in Doors and Locks in the Features and Controls section for more information 1751347 2 Place the wheel wrench A onto the hoist drive nut B 3 Turn
135. apor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others read and follow all the instructions on the pump island Turn off your engine when you are refueling Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refuel ing your vehicle Do not use cellular phones Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle This is against the law in some places Do not re enter vehicle while pumping fuel Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel 1733916 The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the passengers side of the vehicle To remove the fuel cap turn it slowly coun terclockwise The fuel cap has a spring in it if the cap is released too soon it will spring back to the right WARNING If you spill fuel and then something ignites it you could be badly burned Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full and is more likely in hot weather Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop Then unscrew the cap all the way Be careful not to spill fuel Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible Refer to Washing Your Vehicle in this sec
136. arning Light Ped WRT 808241 The engine coolant temperature warning light will come on when the engine has overheated If this happens you should pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible Refer to Engine Overheating in Check ing Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section for more information NOTE Driving with the engine coolant tempera ture warning light on could cause your vehicle to overheat Refer to Engine Over heating in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section Your vehicle could be dam aged and it might not be covered by your warranty Never drive with the engine cool ant temperature warning light on 3 20 INSTRUMENT PANEL This light will also come on when starting your vehicle If it does not have your vehi cle serviced Engine Coolant Temperature Gage 1716501 This gage shows the engine coolant tem perature If the pointer moves towards the H the engine is too hot A temperature indicator light will turn on and a chime will sound If you have been operating your vehicle under normal driving conditions and the temperature indicator light comes on you should pull off the road stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possi ble 3 21 Tire Pressure Light 1198521 This light will come on briefly when you turn the
137. arning appears on the Driver Information Center DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected Refer to Engine Oil in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Ser vice and Appearance Care section for more information This message displays when the vehicle s engine oil pressure is low The oil pressure light also appears on the instrument panel cluster Refer to Oil Pressure Light in this section Stop the vehicle immediately as engine damage can result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure Have the vehicle ser viced by your dealer as soon as possible when this message is displayed PASSENGER DOOR FRONT REAR OPEN This message displays when one or more of the passenger s doors are not closed properly When this message appears make sure that all passenger doors are closed completely 3 32 INSTRUMENT PANEL REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to your vehicle Refer to LEARN REMOTE KEY under DIC Oper ation and Displays in this section for more information SERVICE A C Air Conditioning SYS TEM This message displays when there is a problem detected in the air conditioning system Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays when there is a problem with the airbag system Have your vehicle
138. art the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfort able from the cold But do it as little as pos sible Preserve the fuel as long as you can To help keep warm you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exer cises every half hour or so until help comes If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck you will need to spin the wheels but you do not want to spin your wheels too fast The method known as rocking can help you get out when you are stuck but you must use caution A WARNING If you let your vehicle s tires spin at high speed they can explode and you or others could be injured And the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage When you are stuck spin the wheels as little as possible Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph 55 km h as shown on the speedom eter CAUTION Spinning the wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting the transaxle back and forth you can destroy the transaxle Refer to Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out in this section For information about using tire chains on your vehicle refer to Tire Chains in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out First turn the steering wheel lef
139. as senger seat your vehicle will have third row roof mounted rollover airbags Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts Even though today s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system A WARNING You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt even if you have airbags Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts All airbags are designed to work with safety belts but do not replace them Frontal airbags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to deploy in moderate to severe frontal and near frontal crashes They are not designed to inflate in rollover rear crashes or in many side crashes And for some unrestrained occupants frontal airbags may pro vide less protection frontal crashes than more forceful airbags have provided in the past Continued A WARNING Continued Roof mounted rollover airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle during a vehicle rollover or in a severe frontal impact They are not designed to inflate in rear crashes
140. atic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside and the exterior lamps control is in the automatic position the headlamps will come on auto matically Refer to Headlamps in this sec tion Your vehicle has a light sensor located on top of the instrument panel Make sure it is not covered or the headlamps will be on when you do not need them The system may also turn on the head lamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel Fog Lamps If your vehicle has this feature use your fog lamps for better visibility in foggy or misty conditions 808603 The button for your fog lamps is located on the center console to the right of the rear wipe and rear wash switches and above the shift lever Push the button to turn the fog lamps on or off When using fog lamps the parking lamps or low beam headlamps must be on A light on the button will come on when the fog lamps are on Fog lamps will go off whenever you turn the high beam head lamps on When the high beam head lamps are turned off the fog lamps will come on again Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps INSTRUMENT PANEL Instrument Panel Brightness This feature controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights 1788862 The control for this feature is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steer ing column Turn the control to the right to brig
141. auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a porta ble audio player is not connected No Aux Input Device displays If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary device is con nected the DVD CD AUX button cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available Refer to Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment System in this section for more information If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navi gate the CD tracks only through the remote control Audio Output Only one audio source can be heard through the speakers at one time An audio source is defined as DVD slot CD slot XM FM AM Front Auxiliary Jack or Rear Auxiliary Jack Press the power button to turn the radio on The radio can be heard through all of the vehicle speakers Front seat passengers can listen to the radio AM FM or XM by pressing the BAND button or the DVD CD AUX button to select CD slot DVD slot front or rear auxiliary input if available If a playback device is plugged into the radio s front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack the front seat passen
142. ave pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb You or others could be injured Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back up Lamps 1802291 A Stoplamp Taillamp Sidemarker Lamp B Turn Signal Lamp Taillamp C Backup Lamp To replace one of these bulbs do the fol lowing 1 Open the liftgate Refer to Liftgate in Doors and Locks in the Features and Controls section for more information OP OM Co 1802297 Remove the taillamp screw covers Remove the taillamp screws Pull the taillamp assembly towards you Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to disconnect it from the taillamp assembly Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket Push the new bulb into the bulb socket Insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly and turn it clockwise to secure Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the taillamp assembly When reinstall ing the screws do not overtighten License Plate Lamp To replace one of these bulbs do the fol lowing 1 Push tabs to remove the license plate lamp from the liftgate s f 1708173 2 Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket 3 Install the new bulb 4 Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license plate lamp SERVICE AND APPEARANC
143. ay also affect the function of the remote control If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot the remote control power button can be used to turn on the video screen display and start the disc The radio can also turn on the video screen display Refer to Radio with CD and DVD MP3 in this section for more information CAUTION Storing the remote control in a hot area or in direct sunlight can damage it and the repairs will not be covered by your warranty Keep the remote control stored in a cool dry place Remote control buttons 1523717 5 Power Press this button to turn the video screen on and off XX Illumination Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on The backlight will automati cally time out after seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed while the back light is on Title Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD This function may vary for each disc Main Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the up down left and right arrow but tons to move the cursor around the DVD menu After making a selection press the INSTRUMENT PANEL enter button This button only operates when using a DVD A W lt Menu Navigation Arrows Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu lt 4 Enter Press this button to select the choice that is highlighted in any men
144. ayed on the DIC to select it AUTO LOCK This feature allows you to select when the vehicle s doors will automatically lock Refer to Programmable Automatic Door Locks in Doors and Locks in the Fea tures and Controls section for more infor mation Press the vehicle information button until AUTO LOCK appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings SHIFT OUT OF PARK default The vehicle s doors automatically lock when the doors are closed and the vehi cle is shifted out of PARK P AT VEHICLE SPEED The vehicle s doors automatically lock when the vehicle speed is above 5 mph 8 km h for three seconds NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is dis played on the DIC to select it AUTO UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlock ing feature It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will auto matically unlock Refer to Programmable Automatic Door Locks in Doors and Locks in the Features and Controls sec tion for more information Press the vehicle information button until AUTO UNLOCK appears on the DIC dis play Press the set reset button to access the settings for this fea
145. be dangerous In trying to do some jobs you can be seriously injured Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job If you have any doubt see your dealer to have a qual ified technician do the work Refer to Doing Your Own Service Work in the SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE section Some maintenance services can be com plex So unless you are technically quali fied and have the necessary equipment you should have your dealer do these jobs When you go to your dealer for your ser vice needs you will know that trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts Owner Checks and Services in this sec tion tells you what should be checked when to check it and what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condi tion The proper replacement parts fluids and lubricants to use are listed in Recom mended Fluids and Lubricants and Nor mal Maintenance Replacement Parts in this section When your vehicle is serviced make sure these are used All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle Scheduled Maintenance When the change engine oil light and or CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on it means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle ser viced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles 1000 km
146. buttons AUX Auxiliary This button is on a vehicle that has the Rear Climate Control System Press it to turn on the rear heating and air condition ing Refer to Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System in this section for more information e Outside Air Press this button to turn on the outside air mode While this mode is on outside air circulates throughout the vehicle An indi cator light in the button comes on when this button is pressed The outside air mode can be used with all modes but it cannot be used with the recirculation mode Recirculation Press this button to recirculate cabin air through the vehicle It can be used to pre vent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle or to help heat or cool the air inside the vehicle more quickly An indica tor light above the symbol comes on in this mode Operation in this mode during peri ods of high humidity and cool outside tem peratures can result in increased window fogging If window fogging is experienced select the defrost mode The recirculation mode cannot be used with outside air floor defog or defrost modes If your vehicle has a Rear Climate Control System use this button to switch between outside air and recirculation X Air Conditioning Press this button to turn the air condition ing system on or off When this button is pressed an indicator light on the button comes on to let you know the air condition ing is
147. by law SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Exces sive speed underinflation or exces sive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the fac tory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis However if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehi cle pulling to one side or the other the alignment may need to be checked If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road your tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced See your dealer for proper diagnosis 5 36 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent cracked or badly rusted or corroded If wheel nuts keep coming loose the wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced If the wheel leaks air replace it except some aluminum wheels which can sometimes be repaired See your dealer if any of these conditions exist Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity diameter width offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces If you need to re
148. ce in Mainte nance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section for when to replace the filter To change the passenger compartment air filter use the following steps 1580378 1 Remove the push pins from the rear of the passenger s side air inlet panel It is located in the rear of the engine com INSTRUMENT PANEL partment on the passenger side of the vehicle 2 Open the hood 3 Remove the push pins from the top and forward edge of the passenger s side air inlet panel 4 Remove the air inlet panel 5 Remove the filter from the filter housing by pressing the release tab at the inboard edge of the filter housing 6 Remove the filter from the vehicle 7 Install a new passenger compartment air filter For the type of filter to use refer to Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section 8 Reverse Steps 1 through 5 3 14 INSTRUMENT PANEL Warning Lights Gages and Indicators This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle The pictures will help you locate them Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes seri ous enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehi cl
149. ce at your abdomen This could cause serious or even fatal injuries The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash A WARNING You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose In a crash you would move forward too much which could increase injury The shoulder belt should fit against your body Question What is wrong with this E Se P BAY a 811744 Answer The belt is over an armrest WARNING You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this The belt would be much too high Ina crash you can slide under the belt The belt force would then be applied at the abdomen not at the pelvic bones and that could cause serious or fatal injuries Be sure the belt goes under the armrests SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1378915 To unlatch the belt push the button on the buckle Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults When installed on a shoulder belt the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head There is one guide available for each out board passenger p
150. ces Service Instruction Kilometers 40000 80000 120000 160000 200000 240000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Refer to Engine Air Cleaner Fil ter in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section Replace engine air cleaner filter Change automatic transaxle fluid Replace spark plugs An Emission Control Service 6 11 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Service Instruction Kilometers 40000 80000 120000 160000 200000 240000 Engine cooling system service or every five years whichever occurs first An Emission Control Ser vice Drain flush and refill cooling system This service can be complex you should have your dealer perform this service e Refer to Engine Coolant in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section for what to use Inspect hoses Clean radiator condenser pres sure cap and filler neck Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap Inspect engine accessory drive belt An Emission Control Service Visually inspect belt for fraying excessive cracks or obvious damage Replace belt if necessary 6 12 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed a
151. changes could cause the tires to slide You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding Learn to recognize warning clues 4 9 such as enough water ice or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored sur face and slow down when you have any doubt If you have the Anti Lock Brake System ABS remember It helps avoid only the braking skid If you do not have ABS then in a braking skid where the wheels are no longer rolling release enough pressure on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again This restores steering control Push the brake pedal down steadily when you have to stop suddenly As long as the wheels are rolling you will have steering control Remember Any Anti Lock Brake System ABS helps avoid only the braking skid Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired by alcohol or drugs with night vision problems or by fatigue Here are some tips on night driving Drive defensively Do not drink and drive Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce glare from headlamps behind you Since you cannot see as well you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles Slow down especially on higher speed roads Your vehicle s headlamps can light up only much road ahead n remote areas watch for animals f you are tired pull off the road in a safe
152. ck wise to increase or decrease the volume Speed Compensated Volume SCV The radio is also equipped with Speed Compensated Volume SCV When SCV is on the radio volume automatically adjusts to compensate for road and wind noise as you speed up or slow down while driving That way the volume level should sound about the same as you drive To activate SCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 3 44 INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 3 Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM label on the radio display 4 Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed Compensated Volume setting OFF Low Med or High to select the level of radio volume compensation The display times out after approxi mately 10 seconds Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compen sation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between AM FM or XM if equipped The display shows the selection 44 Tune Turn this knob to select radio stations ki SEEK Press the right or left SEEK arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong signal
153. ck button and then the pushbutton located under the for ward arrow label Once the time 12H and 24H are displayed press the pushbutton located under the desired option to select the default Press the clock button again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out Setting the Time with date display If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD player or a CD with DVD player the radio will have a clock button for setting the time and date To set the time and date follow these instructions 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press the clock button and the HR MIN MM DD YYYY hour minute month day and year will appear on the display 3 Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels that you want to change Every time the pushbutton is pressed again the time or the date if selected will increase by one Another way to increase the time or date is to press the right SEEK arrow or FWD forward button To decrease press the left SEEK arrow or REV reverse button You can also turn the tune knob located on the upper right side of the radio to adjust the selected setting INSTRUMENT PANEL The date will not automatically display The only way to see the date is by pressing the clock button when the radio is on The date with display will time out after a few sec onds and go back to the normal radio and time display To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to chan
154. cle has a computer system that lets you know when to change the engine oil and filter This is based on engine revo lutions and engine temperature and not on mileage Based on driving conditions the mileage at which an oil change will be indi cated can vary considerably For the oil life 5 8 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE system to work properly you must reset the system every time the oil is changed When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished it will indicate that an oil change is necessary A change engine oil light and a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will come on Refer to Change Engine Oil Light in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section and DIC Warn ings and Messages in Driver Information Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section Change your oil as soon as possi ble within the next 600 miles 1000 km It is possible that if you are driving under the best conditions the oil life system may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year However your engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work and reset the system It is also important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the proper level If the system is ever reset accidentally you must change your oil at 3000 miles 5000 km since yo
155. ct in place Do not pry the clamps off 1733580 4 Remove the air outlet duct 5 Undo the clamps on the filter cover To remove the cover pull up on the front and then pull the cover out 6 Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and inspect the air cleaner and air outlet duct for cracks cuts and deterioration The air outlet duct must be replaced if damaged 7 Reinstall the filter cover and latch the clamps 8 Reattach the air outlet duct and tighten the screws on the clamps that hold the duct in place 9 Reconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE WARNING Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned The air cleaner not only cleans the air it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires If it is not there and the engine back fires you could be burned Do not drive with it off and be careful work ing on the engine with the air cleaner filter off CAUTION If the air cleaner filter is off a back fire can cause a damaging engine fire And dirt can easily get into your engine which will damage it Always have the air cleaner filter in place when you are driving Automatic Transaxle Fluid It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss If a leak occurs take your vehicle to th
156. cted 2 Visually check the tires for the following points the depth of the tread groove abnormal wear cracks and damage loose wheel nuts existence of foreign material such as nails stones etc Refer to Tires in the SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE section for details 3 Look for oil or other fluid leaks NOTE It is normal for water to drip from the air conditioning system after use 4 Make sure the hood is fully closed and latched 5 Check the headlights turn signal lights brake lights and horn for proper opera tion 6 Lock all doors 7 Adjust the seat and adjustable head restraints if equipped 8 Check the brake pedal 9 Adjust the mirrors 10 Make sure that you and all passengers have properly fastened your safety belts 11 Make sure that all warning lights come on as the key is turned to the ON or START position 12 Check all gauges 13 Make sure that the BRAKE light turns off when the parking brake is released Once a week or each time you fill your fuel tank perform the following under hood checks 1 Engine oil level 2 Coolant level 3 Brake fluid level 4 Power steering if equipped fluid level Windshield washer fluid level Hood latch operation Pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle Make sure that you cannot open the hood all the way without releasing the secondary latch Be sure to close the hood securely after check ing for prop
157. ction 2 D Headlamp High Low Beam Changer Refer to Headlamp High Low Beam Changer in this section Flash to Pass Refer to Flash to Pass in this section e XX Exterior Lamp Control Refer to Headlamps in this section Turn and Lane Change Signals The turn signal has two upward for right and two downward for left positions These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change To signal a turn move the lever all the way up or down When the turn is finished the lever will return automatically 808320 An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change To signal a lane change raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash Hold it there until you complete the lane change The lever will return by itself when you release it As you signal a turn or a lane change if the arrows flash rapidly a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won t see your turn signal If a bulb is burned out replace it to help avoid an accident If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn check the fuse refer to Fuses and Circuit Breakers in Electrical System in the Service and Appearance Care section and for burned out bulbs Headlamp High Low Beam Changer To change the headlamps from low beam to high push the turn signal lever away from you To change from high beam to low beam pull the turn signal l
158. culty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled refer to Care of Your CDs and DVDs in this section Care of Your CDs and DVDs for more information If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD CAUTION If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris Do not add any label to a CD it could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a soft marker pen If an error appears on the display see CD Messages later in this section amp EJECT Press the CD eject button to eject CD R s To eject the CD R that is currently playing press and release this button A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD R can be removed If the CD R is not removed after several seconds the CD R automatically pulls back into the player and begins playing 44 Tune
159. cy so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important And of course actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road whether it is pavement or gravel the con dition of the road whether it is wet dry or icy tire tread the condition of the brakes the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied Avoid needless heavy braking Some peo ple drive in spurts heavy acceleration fol lowed by heavy braking rather than keeping pace with traffic This is a mistake The brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops The brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking That means better braking and longer brake life If your vehicle s engine ever stops while you are driving brake normally but do not pump the brakes If you do the pedal may get harder to push down If the engine Stops you will still have some power brake assist But you will use it when you brake Once the power assist is used up it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push Adding non Suzuki accessories can affect your vehicle s performance Refer to Accessories and Modifications in Ser vice in the Service and Appearance Care section Anti Lock Brake System ABS Your vehicle has the Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS an
160. cycles through all available options such as DVD slot CD slot Front Auxiliary and Rear Auxiliary if available Refer to Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment System in this section for more information If a MP3 is inserted into top DVD slot the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navi gate the CD tracks only through the remote control 3 64 INSTRUMENT PANEL XM Radio Messages Radio Display Message Condition Action Required XL Explicit Language Channels XL on the radio display after the channel name indicates content with explicit language These channels or any others can be blocked at a cus tomer s request by calling 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 XM Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated and no action is required This process should take no longer than 30 seconds No XM Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly but the vehicle is in a loca tion that is blocking the XM signal When you move into an open area the signal should return Loading XM Acquiring channel audio after four second delay The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data No action is needed This message should disappear shortly Channel Off Air Channel not in service This chann
161. d IDLE ENGINE NOTE If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Do not increase the engine speed above nor mal idling speed Refer to Engine Over heating in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section for more information This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down ENGINE OVERHEATD Overheated STOP ENGINE NOTE If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating severe engine damage may occur If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and or DIC stop the vehicle as soon as possible Refer to Engine Overheating in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section for more information This message displays along with a contin uous chime when the engine has over heated Stop and turn the engine off immediately to avoid severe engine dam age Refer to Engine Overheating in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays when the vehicle s engine power is reduced Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle s ability to accelerate If this message is on but there is no r
162. d GM6094M SAE 5W 30 As shown in the viscosity chart SAE 5W 30 is best for your vehicle These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity or thickness Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W 50 808500 Oils meeting these requirements should also have the starburst symbol on the con tainer This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petro leum Institute API Look for this information on the oil con tainer and use only those oils that are identified as meeting standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE CAUTION Use only engine oil identified as meeting standard GM6094M showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty If you are in an area of extreme cold where the temperature falls below 20 F 29 C it is recommended that you use either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W 30 oil Both provide easier cold starting and better protection for the engine at extremely low temperatures Engine Oil Additives Do not add anything to the oil The recom mended oils with the starburst symbol that meet standard GM6094M are all you need for good performance and engine protec tion Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil Your vehi
163. d under warranty CAUTION Improper installation of mobile com munication equipment such as cellu lar telephones or CB Citizen s Band radios may cause electronic interfer ence with your vehicle s ignition sys tem resulting in vehicle performance problems Consult your SUZUKI dealer or qualified service technician for advice on installing such mobile communication equipment Vehicle Symbols Your vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text Symbols used on your vehicle are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component control message gauge or indicator If you need help figuring out a specific name of a component gauge or indicator reference the following topics Seats and Restraint Systems in Section Climate Controls in Section 3 Engine Compartment Overview in Sec 1 Warning Lights gauges and Indicators tion 5 Features and Controls in Section 2 in Section 3 Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3 Audio System s in Section 3 These are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle ERN LATCH BOTH LAP AND SHOULDER BELTS ASTER ENGINE E INJURY PROTECT OCCUPANT 4 TRENG oe ES pressu DO NOT TWIST SAFETY ATO TEMP 0 BELT WHEN ATTACHING PROTECT TURN FUSE 4 EYES BY FASTEN SIGNALS qm BATTERY BOX SHIELDING SERT AIRBAG X CHARGING access BE
164. d Warranty Limited Warranty For SUZUKI Parts or Accessories Emission Components Defect Warranty Emission Performance Warranty GENERAL INFORMATION On Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data Recorders Your vehicle like other modern motor vehicles has a number of sophisti cated computer systems that monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle s performance Your vehicle uses on board vehicle computers to monitor emission control components to optimize fuel economy to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and if so equipped to provide anti lock braking and to help the driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situa tions Some information may be stored during regular operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions other information is stored only in a crash event by computer systems such as those commonly called event data recorders EDR In a crash event computer systems such as the Airbag Sensing and Diag nostic Module SDM in your vehicle may record information about the con dition of the vehicle and how it was operated such as data related to engine speed brake application throt tle position vehicle speed safety belt usage airbag readiness airbag per formance and the severity of a colli sion This information has been used to improve vehicle crash performance 7 2 GENERAL INFORMATION and may be used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and driving safe
165. d able service experts in dealerships all across North America They will be ready and willing to help if you need it DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Here are some things you can check before a trip Windshield Washer Fluid Is the reservoir full Are all windows clean inside and outside Wiper Blades Are they in good shape Fuel Engine Oil Other Fluids Have you checked all levels Lamps Are they all working Are the lenses clean Tires They are vitally important to a safe trou ble free trip Is the tread good enough for long distance driving Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure Weather Forecasts What is the weather outlook along your route Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system Maps Do you have up to date maps Highway Hypnosis Is there actually such a condition as high way hypnosis Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel Call it highway hyp nosis lack of awareness or whatever There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery along with the hum of the tires on the road the drone of the engine and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy Do not let it happen to you If it 4 12 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE does your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second and you could crash and be injured What can you do about highway hypnosis First be aware that it can happen Then he
166. d ceiling covering for roof mounted rollover airbags Do not open or break the airbag cover ings Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash A WARNING A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash To help make sure your restraint systems are working prop erly after a crash have them inspected and necessary replacements made as soon as pos sible 1 43 If you have had a crash do you need new belts or LATCH system parts After a very minor collision nothing may be necessary But if the belts were stretched as they would be if worn during a more severe crash then you need new parts If the LATCH system was being used dur ing a more severe crash you may need new LATCH system parts If belts are cut or damaged replace them Collision damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH system safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system was not being used at the time of the collision If an airbag inflates you will need to replace airbag system parts See the part on the airbag system earlier in this section If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace the driver and front pas senger s safety belt retractor assembly Be sure to do so Then the new retractor assemb
167. d for dif ferent types of music The choices are pop rock country talk jazz and classical Selecting MANUAL or changing bass or treble returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings Unique EQ settings can be saved for each Source If the radio has a Bose audio system the EQ settings are either MANUAL or TALK Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust balance or fade press the tune knob until the speaker control labels dis play Press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting The highlighted setting can also be adjusted by pressing either the SEEK FWD forward or REV reverse button until the desired levels are obtained To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position press the pushbutton posi tioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to the middle position at one time press the tune knob for more than two sec onds until a beep sounds Finding a Category CAT Station CAT Category The CAT button is used to find XM sta tions when the radio is in the XM mode To find XM channels within a desired category perform the following 1 Press the BAND button until the XM frequency displays Press the CAT but ton to display the categ
168. d if you open the driver s door when the key has not been removed from the ignition CAUTION Using a tool to force the key from the ignition switch could cause damage or break the key Use the correct key and turn the key only with your hand Make sure the key is in all the way If none of this works then your vehicle needs service FEATURES AND CONTROLS LOCK You will only be able to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK The ignition switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is in PARK P ACC Accessory This position operates some of your elec trical accessories RUN This is the position the switch returns to after you start your engine and release the Switch The switch stays in the RUN posi tion when the engine is running But even when the engine is not running you can use RUN to operate your electrical acces Sories and to display some warning and indicator lights The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the ACC or RUN position with the engine off You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time Q START This position starts the engine When the engine starts release the key The ignition Switch will return to RUN for normal driv ing Key In the Ignition Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside as it is an easy target for joy riders or thieves If you leave the key in the ig
169. d on the top of the seatback and push the restraint down The third row head rests adjust like the front seat head restraints 1811484 The third row seat head rests can be removed from the seatback To do this press the button located on the top of the seatback and pull them out from the seat back Store the head rest front side facing up in the compartment behind the third row by inserting the head rest posts into the slots in the storage area SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Passenger Folding Seatback The front passenger s seatback may fold flat A WARNING If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer objects such as skis be sure any such cargo is not near an airbag In a crash an inflating airbag might force that object toward a per son This could cause severe injury or even death Secure objects away from the area in which an airbag would inflate For more information 3618866 1618564 refer to Where Are the Airbags in this section and refer to Loading 3 Lift the recliner lever located on the 4 Continue to fold the seat forward until it Vehicle in Y Driving th outboard side of the seat up fully and locks in the folded position M Mast and Your Vehicle nthe Driv fold the seatback forward until it disen 5 Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is ing Your Vehicle section gages locked A WARNING Things you put on this seatback can strike and inju
170. d then off f you make a hard stop the light may come on for a moment This is normal WARNING Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low If you do your engine can become so hot that it catches fire You or others could be burned Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced CAUTION Lack of proper engine oil mainte nance may damage the engine The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the mainte nance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil Change Engine Oil Light c 806876 If this light comes on and stays on for 30 seconds it means that service is required for your vehicle After having the oil changed you will need to reset the light Refer to Engine Oil in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care and Scheduled Maintenance in Mainte nance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section for more information Security Light 811473 Your vehicle has a theft deterrent system With this system the security light will flash as you open the door if your ignition is off This light will come on briefly when the vehicle is turned on For more information refer to PASS Key 1 Operation in Theft Deterrent Sys tems in the Features and Controls sec tion Fog Lamp Light 808603 The fog lamp light will come on when the fog lamps are in use The lig
171. d turn the system off if your vehi cle ever gets stuck in sand mud ice or snow and rocking the vehicle is required Refer to Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out in this section e The traction control system can be turned off by pressing the traction control button located on the floor console to the left of the shift lever The traction control system can be acti vated again by pressing the traction control button If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button the traction control off light will appear on the instrument panel cluster The system will not turn off until there is no longer a current need to limit wheel spin You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again If the light does not come on you may not have traction control and your vehicle should be serviced by a dealer Adding non SUZUKI accessories can affect your vehicle s performance Refer to Accessories and Modifications in Ser vice in the Service and Appearance Care section for more information Electronic Stability Control The Electronic Stability Control ESC sys tem is an advanced computer controlled system that helps the driver maintain direc tional control of the vehicle in difficult driv ing conditions This is accomplished by selectively applying any one of the vehi cle s brakes and reducing engine power The ESC system comes on automatically when
172. ded Fluids and Lubricants 6 16 Recreational Vehicle Towing 4 20 Reduced Engine Power Light esee 3 24 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System 2 1 Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation 2 2 Remote Vehicle Start 2 4 Replacement Bulbs eese 5 24 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash 1 43 Reporting Safety Defects 7 3 Restraint System Check eene 1 42 Retained Accessory Power RAP 2 13 Right Front Passenger Position 1 15 Running the Engine While Parked 2 19 S Safety Belt Extender eene 1 18 Safety Belt Pretensioners eene 1 18 Safety Belt Reminder Light eese 3 16 Safety Belts They Are for Everyone 1 9 Safety Certification Label eene 7 1 Scheduled Maintenance eene 6 2 Scheduled Maintenance except 6 3 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH ESI NT 1 28 Securing a Child Restraint i
173. display Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc dis plays Press the pushbutton again to turn off random play BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD remains safely inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listen ing to the radio The CD icon and a mes sage showing disc and or track number appears on the display when a CD is in the player Press this button again and the sys tem automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not con nected No Input Device Found displays Playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc If you have a radio with a CD MP3 it has the capability of playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc refer to Using an in the index CD Messages CHECK DISC If this message appears on the display and or the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons t is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play INSTRUMENT PANEL The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again There may have been a problem while burning the CD Th
174. djust all speaker and tone con trols to the middle position press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds Finding a Category CAT Station CAT Category The CAT button is used to find XM sta tions when the radio is in the XM mode To find XM channels within a desired category perform the following INSTRUMENT PANEL 1 Press the BAND button until the XM frequency is displayed Press the CAT button to display the category labels on the radio display Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name is displayed 2 Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immedi ately tune to the first XM station associated with that category 3 Turn the tune knob press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed or press the right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next or previous XM sta tion within the selected category 4 To exit the category search mode press the FAV button or BAND button to display your favorites again Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu To remove an undesired category perform the following 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label 3 Turn the tune knob to display the cate gory you want removed 4 Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displa
175. driving It pro vides the best fuel economy for your vehi cle If the vehicle needs more power for passing and it is Going less than 35 mph 55 km h push the accelerator pedal about halfway down Going about 35 mph 55 km h or more push the accelerator pedal all the way down The vehicle will shift down to the next gear and have more power Downshifting the transaxle in slippery road conditions could result in skidding refer to Loss of Control in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section CAUTION Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may dam age the transaxle If you are stuck do not spin the tires When stopping on a hill use the brakes to hold the vehi cle in place MANUAL SHIFT MODE M This position available on the models with the Manual Shift Mode MSM allows you to change gears similar to a manual tran saxle If your vehicle has this feature see Manual Shift Mode Manual Shift Mode MSM Automatic Transaxle ozuu ist 1722685 To use this feature do the following 1 Move the shift lever from DRIVE D to the left into the MANUAL SHIFT MODE M While driving in manual mode the tran saxle will remain in the driver selected gear When coming to a stop in the manual position the vehicle will automatically shift into FIRST 1
176. e in Safety Belts in the Seats and Restraint Systems section 4 1 A WARNING Defensive driving really means Be ready for anything On city streets rural roads or expressways it means Always expect the unexpected Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes Anticipate what they might do and be ready Rear end col lisions are about the most prevent able of accidents Yet they are common Allow enough following distance Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driv ing task Anything that distracts from the driving task makes proper defen sive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision with resulting injury Ask a passenger to help do these things or pull off the road in a safe place to do them These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life Drunken Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy It is the number one contributor to the highway death toll claiming thousands of victims every year Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle Judgment Muscular Coordination Vision Attentiveness Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alco hol In most cases these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving In recent years more than 16000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have
177. e s functions As you will see in the details on the following pages some warn ing lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they are working If you are familiar with this sec tion you should not be alarmed when this happens Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle s functions Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there is a problem with your vehicle When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem check the section that tells you what to do about it Please follow this manual s advice Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous So please 3 15 get to know your warning lights and gages They are a big help Instrument Panel Cluster Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehi cle is running You will know how fast you are going how much fuel you are using and many other things you will need to drive safely and economically United States version shown Canada similar 1716507 Speedometer and Odometer Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles per hour mph and kilome ters per hour km h Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven in either miles used in the United States or kilometers used in Canada
178. e if the same person drank three double martinis 3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each within an hour the person s BAC would be close to 0 12 percent A per son who consumes food just before or dur ing drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level There is a gender difference too Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men Since alcohol is carried in body water this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight will when each has the same number of drinks The law in most U S states and through out Canada sets the legal limit at 0 08 per cent In some other countries the limit is even lower For example it is 0 05 percent DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE in both France and Germany The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0 04 percent The BAC will be over 0 10 percent after three to six drinks in one hour Of course as we have seen it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks and how quickly the person drinks them But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of 0 10 percent Research shows that the driving skills of many peo ple are impaired at a BAC approaching 0 05 percent and that the effects are worse at night All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0 05 percent Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of 0 05 percent or above A driver
179. e to turn it off than you were to turn it on If your vehicle is low on fuel do not use the remote start feature The vehicle may run out of fuel To start the engine using the remote start feature do the following 1 Aim the RKE transmitter that has a remote vehicle start button at the vehi cle 2 Press and release the transmitter s lock button then immediately press and hold the remote vehicle start button until the vehicle s turn signal lamps flash or for at least four seconds if the vehicle s lights are not visible The vehi cle s doors will be locked Pressing the remote start button again after the vehi cle has started will turn off the ignition 3 When the vehicle s engine starts the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the engine is running 4 If it is your first remote start since last driving repeat these steps while the engine is still running for a 10 minute time extension When you enter the vehicle during a remote start and the engine is still running turn the key to the RUN position to drive the vehicle After a remote start the engine will auto matically shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has been done or the vehi cle s key is inserted into the ignition switch and turned to RUN FEATURES AND CONTROLS The maximum number of remote starts or remote start attempts between ignition cycles with the key is two If the remote start procedure is used again before
180. e Convex Mirrors Outside Power Mirrors Owner Checks and Services P Parking Brake Parking Over Things That Burn Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Passenger Compartment Air Filter Passenger Folding Seatback Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Passenger Sensing System Passing PASS KeyO 111 Power Door Locks Power Seat Power Steering Fluid Power Windows 8 4 Power Windows and Other Power Options 5 53 Programmable Automatic Door Locks 2 6 Q Questions and Answers About Safety Belts 1 10 R Radio Reception sees eene nnne 3 74 Radio with CD Base eere 3 41 Radio with CD eene 3 44 Radio with CD and DVD 3 49 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System 3 13 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls eene 3 14 Rear Door Security Locks eene 2 6 Rear Seat Entertainment System 3 67 Rear Seat Passengers eene 1 15 Rear Seats 1 6 Rear Window Wiper Washer eene 3 5 Recommen
181. e DIC display to English or metric units refer to UNITS later in this section TRIP Press the trip fuel button until TRIP dis plays This display shows the current dis tance traveled in either miles mi or kilometers km since the last reset for the trip odometer This display will also show the outside air temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Cel sius C The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the set reset button while the trip odometer is displayed AVERAGE SPEED Press the trip fuel button until AVERAGE SPEED displays This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in miles per hour mph or kilometers per hour km h This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value To reset the value press and hold the set reset button The display will return to zero AVG Average ECONOMY Press the trip fuel button until AVG ECON OMY displays This display shows the approximate average miles per gallon mpg or liters per 100 kilometers L 100 km This number is calculated based on the number of mpg L 100 km recorded since the last time this menu item was reset To reset this display press and hold the set reset button The display will return to zero RANGE Press the trip fuel button until RANGE dis plays This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles mi or kilome ters km the vehicle can be dr
182. e DVD menu After making a selection press the enter button This but ton only operates when using a DVD Nav Navigate Press this button to display directional arrows for navigating through the menus amp Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button operates only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active INSTRUMENT PANEL DVD A Audio Display Buttons Once a DVD A is inserted radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback See the tag options listed below for more information The rear seat opera tor can navigate the DVD A menus and controls through the remote control Refer to Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment System in this section for more information The Video Screen does not automatically power on when the DVD A is inserted into the DVD slot It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occu pant through the remote control power but ton gt Il Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon dis plays on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on display the system is in pause mode If the pause icon is showing on display the sys tem is in playback mode lt q Group P Press this button to cycle through musical groupings on the DVD A disc Nav Navigate
183. e Monitor TPM system is not working properly If you drive your vehicle while any of the four sensors are missing or inoperable the warning comes on in about 20 minutes A sensor would be miss ing for example if you put different wheels on your vehicle without transferring the sensors If the warning comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the TPM See your dealer SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL This message displays when the Traction Control System TCS is not functioning properly A warning light also appears on the instrument panel cluster Refer to Traction Control System TCS Warning Light in this section and Traction Control System TCS in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehi cle section for more information Have the TCS serviced by your dealer as soon as possible SERVICE VEHICLE SOON This message displays when a non emis sions related malfunction occurs Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer as soon as possible STABILITY CTRL Control NOT READY This message may display and a warning light on the instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the vehicle and exceeding 30 mph 48 km h for 30 sec onds Refer to Traction Control System TCS Warning Light in this section The Electronic Stability Control ESC system is not functional until the light has turned off Refer to Electronic Stability Control in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle
184. e Warning Light 1198521 5 31 A WARNING Each tire including the spare if pro vided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac ard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres sure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pres sure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a signifi cantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Continued A WARNING Continued Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsi maintain correct tire bility to pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumi nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped
185. e dealership service department and have it repaired as soon as possible Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional Required Services in Mainte nance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section and be sure to use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended 5 10 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Fluids and Lubricants in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section CAUTION Use of the incorrect automatic tran saxle fluid may damage your vehicle and the damages may not be covered by your warranty Always use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in Recommended Fluids Lubri cants in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section Engine Coolant The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with DEX COOL engine coolant This coolant is designed to remain in your vehi cle for five years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km whichever occurs first if you add only DEX COOL extended life coolant The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low If you have a problem with engine overheat ing refer to Engine Overheating in this section A 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant will e Give freezing protection down to 34 F 37 C Give boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C Protect against rust and corrosion 5 11 Help keep the proper engine tempe
186. e hydraulic system WARNING If your vehicle has too much brake fluid it can spill on the engine The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough You or others could be burned and your vehicle could be damaged Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system When your brake fluid falls to a low level your brake warning light will come on Refer to Brake System Warning Light in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section What to Add When you do need brake fluid use only DOT 3 brake fluid Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in Maintenance Schedule in the Mainte nance Schedule section Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before remov ing it This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir A WARNING With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake system the brakes may not work well or they may not even work at all This could cause a crash Always use the proper brake fluid CAUTION Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts For example just a few drops of min eral based oil such as engine oil in the brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid If you spill brake fluid on your vehi cle s painted surfaces the pa
187. e it to your dealer when reporting the problem 3 54 INSTRUMENT PANEL Using the DVD Player The DVD player is controlled by the but tons on the remote control or by the but tons on the radio faceplate Refer to Remote Control under Rear Seat Enter tainment System in this section for more information The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW DVD Video DVD Audio DVD R RW DVD R RW media along with MP3 and WMA for mats If an error message appears on the video screen or the radio refer to DVD Display Error Messages under Rear Seat Enter tainment System in this section and DVD Radio Error Messages in this section for more information Playing a DVD DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not con nected No Aux Input Device displays If a 3 55 disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not indicate No Aux Input Device If a front auxiliary
188. e label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Using the Auxiliary Input Jack Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate This is not an audio output do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack You can however con nect an external audio device such as an iPod laptop computer MP3 player CD changer or cassette tape player etc to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxil iary device while the vehicle is in park P Refer to Defensive Driving in Your Driv ing the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section for more information on driver distraction 3 48 INSTRUMENT PANEL To use a portable audio player connect a 3 5 mm 1 8 inch cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack When a device is con nected press the radio CD AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers 5 Power Volume Turn this knob clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player You may need to do additional volume adjustments from
189. e play pause button on the remote control or press the pushbutton located under the 3 57 play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control If the disc has been ejected or the stop but ton has been pressed twice on the remote control the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc Ejecting a Disc Press the eject button on the radio to eject the disc If a disc is ejected from the radio but not removed the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time The disc is stored in the radio The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically In case loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD Eject button more than five seconds to force the disc to eject DVD Radio Error Messages Player Error This message displays when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error This message displays if the disc is not from a correct region No Disc Inserted This message displays if no disc is present when the EJECT or DVD CD AUX button is pressed on the radio Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s The radio system has an auxiliary input
190. e running be sure your vehicle is in PARK P and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it After you have moved the shift lever into PARK P hold the regular brake pedal down Then see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK P without first pushing the button If you can it means that the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK P Torque Lock If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your transaxle into PARK P properly the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK P This is called torque lock To prevent torque lock set the parking brake and then shift into PARK P properly before you leave the driver s seat To find out how refer to Shifting Into Park P in this section When you are ready to drive move the shift lever out of PARK P before you release the parking brake If torque lock does occur you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK P Shifting Out of Park P Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system You have to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever push the shift le
191. e to the side rail Make sure each lever is in the down position The crossrail will not slide when properly engaged A WARNING Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 220 Ibs 100 kg or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your vehicle Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails making sure to fasten it securely 2 23 Do not stand on the plastic lower body panel when loading cargo on the luggage carrier Loading cargo on the luggage carrier will make the center of vehicle gravity higher Avoid high speeds sudden starts sharp turns sudden braking or abrupt maneu vers This could result in loss of control of the vehicle Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading your vehicle For more information on vehicle capacity and loading refer to Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving check now and then to make sure the luggage carrier crossrails are locked and cargo is still securely fastened When the luggage carrier is not in use store the crossrails inside the vehicle If not possible lock one crossrail at the rear most position on the siderails and lock the other crossrail above the opening of the rear door to reduce wind noise Rear Seat Armrest Your vehicle may have a rear
192. e vehi cle was purchased or Maintenance II was performed Maintenance II Use Maintenance II if the previous service performed was Maintenance Always use Maintenance whenever the light mes sage comes on 10 months or more since the last service or if the light message has not come on at all for one year For CANADA Use For CANADA Scheduled Maintenance if the light message comes on or if more than 10 months have elapsed since the most recent maintenance service was per formed 6 2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Scheduled Maintenance except CANADA Service Instruction Maintenance Maintenance Change engine oil and filter Change engine oil and filter if the light message has not come on at all for one year Refer to Engine Oil in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section Reset oil life system An Emission Control Service If the system is ever reset accidentally perform the maintenance service within 3000 miles 5000 km since your last service Refer to Engine Oil Life System in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section Visually check for any leaks or damage A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed Rotate tires and check infla tion pressures and wear Rotate tires every 5000
193. ease the parking brake CAUTION Towing an all wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels or even only two wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain or transmission compo nents Towing a front wheel drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain or transmission components Do not tow an all wheel drive vehicle with two or four wheels on the ground or a front wheel drive vehicle if all four wheels will be on the ground If you have an all wheel drive vehicle it cannot be towed with any of its wheels on 4 20 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE the ground It can be towed with car carrier equipment Level Control Your vehicle may have this feature This self adjusting type of level control is fully automatic and will provide a better leveled riding position as well as better handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions The system is activated when sufficient weight is added to the vehicle and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter A hydraulic pump inside each rear shock absorber raises the rear of the vehicle to the proper height based on inputs from the road surface while the vehicle is being driven It takes approxi mately two miles 3 2 km of driving for the leveling to complete depending on the road surface conditions If the loaded vehicle is not moved for approximately twelve hours the leveling system may bleed down to a lower height This can be especially apparent
194. eatback in place If your front passenger s seat is a flat folding seat you must fully raise the lever to disengage the seatback 806881 A WARNING Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dan gerous Even if you buckle up your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body Instead it will be in front of you In a crash you could go into it receiving neck or other injuries The lap belt cannot do its job either In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen The belt forces would be there not at your pelvic bones This could cause serious internal injuries Continued A WARNING Continued For proper protection when the vehi cle is in motion have the seatback upright Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving Head Restraints 805677 Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant s head This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1525254 Pull the head restraint up to raise it To lower the head restraint press the button locate
195. eating position 2 Put the child restraint on the seat 3 Attach and tighten the lower attach ments on the child restraint to the lower anchors the 2 If the child restraint manufacturer rec ommends that the top tether be attached attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor if your vehicle has one Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps 1 Find the top tether anchor 2 Route attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the follow ing instructions 1549926 If the position you are using has an adjust able head restraint and you are using a dual tether route the tether around the head restraint 1 29 1549824 If the position you are using has an adjust able head restraint and you are using a single tether raise the head restraint and route the tether under the head restraint and in between the head restraint posts 3 Push and pull the child restraint in dif ferent directions to be sure it is secure Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position There is limited space in the third row rear seating area If you want to secure a child restraint in a rear seating position in the third row be sure to study the instructions that came with your child restraint to see if there is enough room to secure your seat properly If the length of the seat cushion is too short for your child restraint
196. ecause they can alter the appearance by increas ing the gloss in a non uniform manner Some commercial products may increase gloss on your instrument panel The increase in gloss may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the wind shield under certain conditions Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry A WARNING Do not bleach or dye safety belts If you do it may severely weaken them In a crash they might not be able to provide adequate protection Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth During very cold damp weather frequent application may be required Refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in Maintenance Sched ule in the Maintenance Schedule sec tion Washing Your Vehicle The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty depth of color gloss retention and durability The best way to preserve the vehicle s fin ish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun Use a car washing soap Do not use strong soaps or chemical detergents Be sure to rinse the vehicle well removing all soap residue completely Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer Refer to Veh
197. ecommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer Usage Fluid Lubricant Engine oil which meets Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certi Engine Oil fied for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol The proper viscosity for your vehicle s engine is an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE OW 30 oil Engine Coolant 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and use only DEX COOL Coolant Hydraulic Brake System Delco9 Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 brake fluid Automatic Transaxle Use only T IV Automatic Transmission Fluid Part No SUZUKI ATF 3317 or Mobil ATF 3309 Hood Latch Assembly Secondary Latch Pivots Spring Lubricate Aerosol type lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI 2 Category LB or GC LB Anchor and Release Pawl Key Lock Cylinders Hood and Door Hinges Multi Purpose Lubricant Superlube Rear Folding Seat Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant or Dielectric Silicone Grease 6 16 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer Part SUZUKI Part No Engine Air Cleaner Filter 13780 78J00 Engine Oil Filter 16510 78J00 Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 95861 78J00 Replacement Battery 33610
198. ecorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2 Compressed Audio The radio will also play discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and files By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side of the screen but plays both file formats in the order in which they were recorded to the disc MP3 Format If you burn your own disc on a per sonal computer Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD R or CD RW disc INSTRUMENT PANEL Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc The CD player is able to read and play a maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists and 512 folders and files Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving Orga nize songs by albums using one folder for each album Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less Avoid subfolders The system can sup port up to eight subfolders deep how ever keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the com plexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback Make sure playlists have a mp3 or wpl extension other file extensions may not work Minimize the length of the file folder or playlist names Long file folder or playl ist names or a combination of a large number of files and folders or playlists may cause the player to be unable to play up to the maximum number of files folders playlists or sessions If you wish to play a large nu
199. ed 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AA A B C The traction grades from highest to low est are AA A B and C Those grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead brak ing traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction char acteristics Temperature B C The temperature grades are A the high est B and C representing the tire s resis tance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high tem perature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required
200. ed tag option dur ing DVD playback See the tag options listed below for more information The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD V menus and controls through the remote control Refer to Remote Control under Rear Seat Entertainment System in this section for more information The Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD V is inserted into the DVD slot gt Il Play Pause Press either the play or pause icon dis plays on the radio system to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD If the forward arrow is showing on display the system is in pause mode If the pause icon is showing on display the sys tem is in playback mode If the DVD screen is off press the play button to turn the screen on Some DVDs begin playing after the pre views have finished although there might be a delay of up to 30 seconds If the DVD does not begin playing the movie automati cally press the pushbutton located under the play pause symbol tag displayed on the radio If the DVD still does not play refer to the on screen instructions if avail able E Stop Press this button to stop playing rewind ing or fast forwarding a DVD lt Enter Press this button to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu Menu Press this button to access the DVD menu The DVD menu is different on every DVD Use the pushbuttons located under the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through th
201. ed wiping cycle Turn the intermittent adjust band down for a longer delay or up for a shorter delay Off Move the lever to this position to turn off the windshield wipers Q Mist Move the lever all the way down to mist and release for a single wiping cycle The windshield wipers will stop after one wipe and then return to the original position If more wipes are needed hold the lever on mist longer Windshield Washer A WARNING In freezing weather do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield blocking your vision There is a button marked with the wind shield washer symbol at the end of the windshield wiper lever Press this button to spray washer fluid on the windshield The wipers will run for a few cycles to clear the window and then either stop or return to your preset speed For more wash cycles press and hold the button longer 3 5 Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear wiper and rear wash buttons are located in the switchbank above the shift lever AJ Rear Wiper Press this button to turn the rear wiper on and off When the button is on the rear wiper will run continuously at a preset speed Press this button to spray washer fluid on the rear window The window wiper will also come on Release the button when enough fluid has been sprayed on the win dow The rear wiper will run a few more cycles after it is released I
202. eduction in performance proceed to your destination The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on but accel eration and speed may be reduced Any time this message stays on the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible Refer to Fuel Gage in this section and Filling the Tank in Fuel in the Service and Appearance Care sec tion for more information HOOD OPEN This message displays on some vehicles when the hood is not closed properly When this message appears make sure that the hood is closed completely Refer to Hood Release in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when the outside air temperature is cold enough to create icy road conditions Adjust your driving accordingly LIFTGATE OPEN This message displays when the liftgate is not closed completely Make sure that the liftgate is closed completely Refer to Lift gate in Doors and Locks in the Features and Controls section INSTRUMENT PANEL OIL PRSSURE Pressure LOW STOP ENGINE CAUTION If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low severe engine damage may occur If a low oil pressure w
203. ehicle s owner To help reduce injuries an add on child restraint must be secured in the vehicle With built in or add on child restraints the child has to be secured within the child restraint When choosing an add on child restraint be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle If it is it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards Then follow the instruc tions for the restraint You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both 1 23 Securing an Add on Child Restraint in the Vehicle A WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle Make sure the child restraint is prop erly installed in the vehicle using the vehicle s safety belt or LATCH sys tem following the instructions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual To help reduce the chance of injury the child restraint must be secured in the vehi cle Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap shoulder belt or by the LATCH system Refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH in this section for more informa tion A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle When securing an add on child restraint refer to the instructions that co
204. ehicle Soon Light 1254434 This light will come on if a condition exists that may require the vehicle to be taken in for service If the light comes on see your dealer for service as soon as possible Fuel Gage a E 1716499 When the ignition is on the fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have left in your fuel tank When the indicator nears empty the low fuel light will come on You still have a little fuel left but you should get more soon Refer to Low Fuel Warning Light in this section for more information Here are four things that some owners ask about None of these show a problem with your fuel gage At the service station the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full t takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gage indicated For example the gage may have indicated the tank was half full but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank s capacity to fill the tank The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or speed up The gage takes a few seconds to stabi lize after the ignition is turned on and will go back to empty when you turn the ignition off For your fuel tank capacity refer to Capac ities and Specifications in the Service and Appearance Care section INSTRUMENT PANEL Low Fuel Warning Light 1406936 This light is located below the fuel gage This light also comes on when t
205. el is not currently in service Tune to another chan nel Channel Unavail Channel no longer available This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned Tune to another station If this station was one of the presets choose another station for that preset button No Artist Info Artist Name Feature not available No artist information is available at this time on this channel The system is working properly No Title Info Song Program Title not available No song title information is available at this time on this chan nel The system is working properly No CAT Info Category Name not available No category information is available at this time on this chan nel The system is working properly No Information No Text Informational message available No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 3 65 INSTRUMENT PANEL Radio Display Message Condition Action Required CAT Not Found No channel available for the chosen category There are no channels available for the selected category The system is working properly XM Theft Locked Theft lock active The XM receiver the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle For security purposes XM receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles If this message appears after having your vehicle serviced check with your dealer XM Radio
206. ells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles called the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle Your dealer can help you with this Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline 4 19 Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle A WARNING Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle WARNING Overloading your vehicle may cause damage Repairs would not be cov ered by your warranty Do not over load your vehicle If you put things inside your vehicle like suitcases tools packages or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes If you have to stop or turn quickly or if there is a crash they will keep going A WARNING Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sud gen stop or turn or in a crash Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle Try to spread the weight evenly Never stack heavier things like suitcases inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops
207. emission control system performance may be affected The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a smog check test Refer to Malfunction Indicator Lamp in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section If this occurs return to your autho rized dealer for diagnosis If it is deter mined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used repairs may not be cov ered by your warranty SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Additives To provide cleaner air all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming allow ing your emission control system to work properly In most cases you should not have to add anything to your fuel How ever some gasolines contain only the min imum amount of additive required to meet U S Environmental Protection Agency regulations To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean or if your vehicle expe riences problems due to dirty injectors or valves look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Also your dealer has additives that will help cor rect and prevent most deposit related problems Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol and reformulated gas olines may be available in your area We recommend that you use these gasolines if they comply with the specifications described earlier However E85
208. en you go downhill e Know how to go down hills The most important thing to know is this let your engine do some of the slowing down Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill Know how to go uphill You may want to shift down to a lower gear The lower gears help cool your engine and tran saxle and you can climb the hill better Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane As you go over the top of a hill be alert There could be something in your lane like a stalled car or an accident You may see highway signs on moun tains that warn of special problems Examples are long grades passing or no passing zones a falling rocks area or winding roads Be alert to these and take appropriate action Winter Driving 808372 Here are some tips for winter driving Have your vehicle in good shape for win ter You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your vehicle Also refer to Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section Include an ice scraper a small brush or broom a supply of windshield washer fluid a rag some winter outer clothing a small shovel a flashlight a red cloth and a cou ple of reflective warning triangles And if you will be driving under severe conditions include a small bag of sand a piece of old
209. er be regarded as any thing more than a supplement to safety belts and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions for the driver s and right front passenger s frontal airbags and only in moderate to severe side collisions or rollovers for vehicles with roof mounted rollover airbags What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates After a frontal airbag inflates it quickly deflates so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated Roof mounted rollover airbags may still be at least partially inflated minutes after the vehicle comes to rest Some components of the airbag module the steering wheel hub for the driver s airbag the instrument panel for the right front passenger s airbag and the area along the ceiling of the vehi cle near the side windows for vehicles with SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS roof mounted side impact airbags may be hot for a short time The parts of the air bag that come into contact with you may be warm but not too hot to touch There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle A WARNING When an airbag inflates there may be dust in the air This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble To avoid this
210. er latch operation Refer to Lubricate body components under Scheduled Maintenance the Maintenance Schedule section for the lubrication schedule WARNING Make sure the hood is fully closed and latched before driving If it is not oo it can fly up unexpectedly during driving obstructing your view and resulting in an accident Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break In CAUTION Your vehicle does not need an elabo rate break in But it will perform bet ter in the long run if you follow these guidelines Do not drive at any one constant speed fast or slow for the first 500 miles 805 km Do not make full throttle starts Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles 322 km or so Dur ing this time your new brake linings are not yet broken in Hard stops with new linings can mean prema ture wear and earlier replacement Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake lin ings Do not tow a trailer during break in Refer to Towing a Trailer in Tow ing in the Driving Your Vehicle section for the trailer towing capa bilities of your vehicle and more information Following break in engine speed and load can be gradually increased Ignition Positions 1410037 With the key in the ignition switch you can turn it to four different positions A warning tone will soun
211. er to Older Chil dren or Infants and Young Children in this section Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door in the first or second row seats or the rear win dows in the third row seat if your vehicle has roof mounted rollover airbags 1 35 e FY 808302 There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster which shows the airbag symbol The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions The light tells you if there is an electrical problem Refer to Airbag Readiness Light in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section for more infor mation Where Are the Airbags 1177656 The driver s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel 809967 The right front passenger s airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger s side 1177533 1197154 The roof mounted rollover airbag for the The roof mounted rollover airbag for the driver and the person seated directly right front passenger and the person behind the driver is located in the ceiling directly behind that passenger is located in above the side windows the ceiling above the side windows SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1700418 If your vehicle has a third row seat the roof mounted rollover airbag is located in the ceiling above the rear windows for the outside passenger positions 1 36 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYST
212. er to the Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface of the fuse panel door Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is located on the passengers side of the center con sole to the left of the glove box near the floor 1708445 Remove the console cover to access the fuse block SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Fuses Usage 800 Elle 11 Passenger s Side Turn ig Signal MD B 12 Amplifier os af X REAR 13 Steering Wheel Illumina RLY Ci tion SPARE Spare Cl el Fel be ll SPARE Spare E re f SPARE Spare 4 L GATE 15A 16 CNSTR VENT 10A 1808062 SPARE Spare Fuses Usage SPARE Spare 1 Sunroof 14 Infotainment 2 Rear Seat Entertainment 15 Climate Control System Remote Function Actuator 3 Rear Wiper 16 Canister Vent 4 Liftgate 17 Radio 5 Airbags 18 Cluster 6 Heated Seats m 19 Ignition Switch 7 Driver s Side Turn Signal 20 Body Control Module 8 Door Locks 21 Not Used 9 Automatic Occupant Sensing Module 22 Center High Mounted Stoplamp Dimmer 10 Power Mirrors 23 Interior Lights 5 54 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Engine Compartment Fuse Block Relays Usage Retained Accessory RAP REY Power Relay REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger Relay RLY Circuit Breakers Usage PWR
213. essages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehi cle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the con dition Multiple messages may appear one after another Some messages may not require immediate action but you can press the set reset button to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display Pressing any of the DIC buttons also acknowledge and clear any messages Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent These messages require action before they can be cleared You should take any messages that appear on the display seriously and remember that clearing the messages will only make the messages disappear not correct the problem The following are the possible messages that can be displayed and some information about them ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF If your vehicle has the All Wheel Drive AWD system this message displays along with the All Wheel Drive Disabled light when the rear drive system is over heating This message turns off when the rear drive system cools down If the warn ing message stays on for a while you need to reset the warning message To reset the warning message turn the ignition off and then back on again If the message stays on see your dealer right away Refer to INSTRUMENT PANEL All Wheel Drive AWD System in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the
214. ever towards you To flash the high beams from low beam pull the turn signal lever all the way towards you Then release it 1799557 When the high beams are on this light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on Flash to Pass This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass To flash the high beams from low beam pull the turn signal multifunction lever all the way towards you Then release it Windshield Wipers Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield gently loosen or thaw them If the blades do become damaged install new blades or blade inserts Refer to Windshield Wiper INSTRUMENT PANEL Blade Replacement in the Service and Appearance Care section Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload 1766016 Use the lever on the right side of the steer ing column to operate the windshield wip ers eB High Speed Move the lever to this position for steady wiping at high speed Low Speed Move the lever to this position for steady wiping at low speed 7 Delay Move the lever to this position to set a delay between wipes 3 4 INSTRUMENT PANEL Delay Adjustment Move the lever to the delay position to choose a delay
215. ever you start your vehicle The SERVICE STABILITY CTRL message may be displayed in the DIC after first driv ing the vehicle and exceeding 30 mph 48 km h for 30 seconds The ESC system is off until the message has turned off This could take up to 15 minutes Refer to DIC Warnings and Messages in Driver Infor mation Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section for more information The SERVICE STABILITY CTRL message will stay on if there is a problem with the system When this message is on the sys tem is not operational Adjust your driving accordingly ESC can be turned off using the traction control button To disable ESC press and hold the traction control button for five seconds ESC can be activated again by pressing the traction control but ton All Wheel Drive AWD System If your vehicle has all wheel drive AWD the AWD system operates automatically without any action required by the driver If the front drive wheels begin to slip the rear wheels will automatically begin to drive the vehicle as required Torque is also applied to the rear wheels during launches There may be a slight engagement noise during hard use but this is normal 1710820 This light and the SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE message in the Driver Information Center DIC will come on and stay on to indicate that there may be a problem with the drive system and service is required Refer to Service All Wheel Drive Light
216. f possi ble A WARNING Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dan gerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack pro vided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire If a tire goes flat the next part shows how to use the jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place Turn on your vehicle s hazard warn ing flashers Refer to Hazard Warning Flashers in Instrument Panel Overview in the Instrument Panel section for more information A WARNING Changing a tire can be dangerous The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other peo ple You and they could be badly injured or even killed Find a level place to change your tire To help prevent the vehicle from moving 1 Set the parking brake firmly 2 Put the shift lever in PARK P 3 Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised 4 Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle To be even more certain the vehicle will not move you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire far thest away from the being ch
217. f the rear wiper function was already on prior to pressing the wash button it will continue to stay on until you press the wiper button again The rear window washer uses the same fluid that is in the windshield washer reser voir Refer to Windshield Washer Fluid in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section Cruise Control With cruise control you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph 40 km h or more without keeping your foot on the accelera tor This can really help on long trips Cruise control does not work at speeds below 25 mph 40 km h WARNING Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed So do not use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads On such roads fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip and you could lose control Do not use cruise con trol on slippery roads Setting Cruise Control WARNING If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to You could be startled and even lose control Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control CJ 1541871 The cruise control buttons are located on the left side of the steering wheel On Off Press this button to turn the cruise control system on
218. ff or the messages become difficult to read have it corrected by your SUZUKI dealer 1 Airbag warning labels on both sunvisors Jacking warning label Brake fluid cap message Surge tank cap message Dynamo meter warning label 1 Airconditionerwarninglabel f JEE Battery label Air bag warning tag Side air bag warning label 10 Side air bag warning label 8 seats model only 11 Pretensioner warning label 12 Second seat folding warning label Driver Passenger 0 FOREWORD All information in this manual is based on the latest product information avail able at the time of publication Due to improvements or other changes there may be discrepancies between informa tion in this manual and your vehicle SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION reserves the right to make production changes at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes to vehicles previously built or sold SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION believes in conservation and protection of Earth s natural resources To that end we encourage every vehicle owner to recycle trade in or properly dis pose of as appropriate used motor oil coolant and other fluids batteries and tires IF YOU HAVE ANY PROBLEMS WITH YOUR SUZUKI Please review the New Vehicle Warranty Information booklet supplied with your SUZUKI Should you have a question or pr
219. for all tires on the vehicle The first rotation is the most important Refer to Scheduled Mainte nance in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section for sched uled rotation intervals EB EB EB HB 811106 When rotating your tires always use the correct rotation pattern shown here Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation After the tires have been rotated adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label Refer to Inflation Tire Pressure in this section and Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System Refer to TPMS Sensor Matching Process under Tire Pressure Monitor System in this section Make certain that all wheel nuts are prop erly tightened Refer to Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifica tions in this section WARNING Rust or dirt on a wheel or on the parts to which it is fastened can make wheel nuts become loose after time The wheel could come off and cause an accident When you change a wheel remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle In an emergency you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later if needed to get all the rust or dirt off Refer to Chan
220. g ing a Flat Tire in this section When It Is Time for New Tires 806296 One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators which will appear when your tires have only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm or less of tread remaining Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire s rubber The tread or sidewall is cracked cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric The tire has a bump bulge or split The tire has a puncture cut or other damage that cannot be repaired well SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE because of the size or location of the damage Buying New Tires The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle when it was new were designed to meet the Tire Performance Criteria Specification TPC spec system rating If you need replacement tires Suzuki strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating This way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same perfor mance and vehicle safety during normal use as the original tires The exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle including brake system perfor mance ride and
221. g brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving Shifting Into Park P A WARNING It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground use the steps that follow If you are pulling a trailer refer to Towing a Trailer in Towing in the Driving Your Vehicle section 1 Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake 2 Move the shift lever into the PARK P position by holding in the button on the shift lever and pushing it all the way toward the front of the vehicle 3 Turn the ignition key to LOCK 4 Remove the key and take it with you If you can leave your vehicle with the igni tion key in your hand your vehicle is in PARK P Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running WARNING It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set And if you leave the vehicle with the engine running it could overheat and even catch fire You or others could be injured Do not leave your vehicle with the engine running If you have to leave your vehicle with the engin
222. g system can do this for you Chemical Paint Spotting Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout Airborne pol lutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on the vehicle This damage can take two forms blotchy ring shaped dis colorations and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface Although no defect in the paint job causes this SUZUKI will repair at no charge to the owner the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12000 miles 20000 km of pur chase whichever occurs first Vehicle Care Appearance Materials Description Usage Description Usage Removes light Polishing Cloth Interior and exterior Cleaner Wax scratches and pro Wax Treated polishing cloth tects finish Tar and Road Removes tar road oil Foaming Tire Cleans shines and Oil Remover and asphalt Shine Low protects in one step No wipi Chioms CREE Gloss wiping necessary Cleaner and stainless steel Medium foaming Polish Wash Wax shampoo Cleans and R il and Concentrate lightly waxes Biode White Sidewall Nah eur faa gradable and phos Tire Cleaner Wwhitewalls phate free Quickly removes spots Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl Spot Lifter and stains from car Glass Cleaner Removes dirt grime smoke and finger prints pets vinyl and cloth upholstery Removes dirt and Odor Eliminator Odorless spray od
223. g the player push Play but sometimes the DVD starts where left off and sometimes at the beginning If the stop button was pressed one time the DVD player will resume playing where the DVD was stopped If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player will begin to play from the beginning of the DVD The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary source mode Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes Check for obstructions low batteries reception range and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using your cellular telephone in the vehicle Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L left and R right on the headphones lost the remote and or the headphones See your dealer for assistance The DVD is playing but there is no picture or sound Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD player 3 72 INSTRUMENT PANEL DVD Display Error Messages The DVD display error message depends on which radio you have The video screen may display one of the following Disc Load Eject Error This message is displayed when there are disc load or eject problems Disc Format Error This message will be displayed if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up or if the disc is damaged Disc Region Error
224. ge displays and a chime sounds when the ignition is on the driver s safety belt is unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion You should buckle your safety belt If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is on and the vehicle is in motion the reminder will be repeated If the driver s safety belt is already buckled this mes sage and chime will not come on This message is an additional reminder to the Safety Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster Refer to Safety Belt Reminder Light in this section CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when service is required for the vehicle See your dealer Refer to Engine Oil in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section and Scheduled Maintenance in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section for more information Acknowledging this message will not reset the OIL LIFE REMAINING display That must be done at the OIL LIFE screen under the vehicle information menu Refer 3 31 to OIL LIFE under DIC Operation and Displays in this section and Engine Oil Life System in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section for more information CHECK TIRE PRESSURE This message displays when the tire pres sure in one of the tires needs to be checked This message also displays LEFT FRONT RIGHT FRONT LEFT REAR or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire needs to be checked Yo
225. ge the date default setting from month day year to day month year follow these instructions 1 Press the clock button and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow label Once the time 12H and 24H and the date MM DD YYYY month day and year and DD MM YYYY day month and year are dis played 2 Press the pushbutton located under the desired option 3 Press the clock or MENU button again to apply the selected default or let the screen time out 3 40 INSTRUMENT PANEL Radio with CD Base 1546915 Playing the Radio 5 Power Volume Press this knob to turn the system on and off Turn this knob clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease the volume The radio remembers the previous volume setting whenever the radio is turned on You can still manually adjust the volume by using the volume knob Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between FM1 FM2 or AM The display shows the selec tion 3 41 44 Tune Turn this knob to select radio stations KI SEEK Press the right or left SEEK arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong signal
226. gers are able to listen to playback from this source through the vehicle speakers Refer to Using the Auxiliary Input Jack s later in this section or Audio Video A V Jacks under Rear Seat Entertainment System in this section for more informa tion Playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc A radio with CD and DVD has the capabil ity of playing an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc For more information on how to play an MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW disc refer to Using an in the index INSTRUMENT PANEL CD Messages If these messages displays and or the CD comes out it could be for one of the follow ing reasons Optical Error The disc was inserted upside down Disk Read Error A disc was inserted with an invalid or unknown format Player Error There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT prob lems It is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again There could have been a problem while burning the CD The label could be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provid
227. get it on you If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin flush the place with water and get medical help immediately 5 Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation If they do you could get a shock The vehicles could be damaged too Before you connect the cables here are some basic things you should know Positive will go to positive or to a remote positive terminal if the vehicle has one Negative will go to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal if the vehicle has one CAUTION If you connect a negative cable to the Engine Control Module ECM ECM mounting bracket or any cables that attach to the ECM bracket you may damage the ECM Attach the negative cable to a heavy unpainted metal engine part other than the ECM ECM bracket or cables attached to the ECM bracket 5 20 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Do not connect positive to negative or you will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too And do not connect the nega tive cable to the negative termi nal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks 6 871918 Connect the red positive cable to the positive terminal location on the vehicle with the dead battery Use a remote positive terminal if the vehi cle has one Do not let the other end touch metal Connect it to the positive term
228. grades outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used pull a trailer are all impor tant It can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle and the amount of tongue weight vehicle can carry Refer to Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section for more infor mation Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehi cle and it has all the required trailering equipment The weight of additional optional equipment passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice or you can write us at our Customer Assistance Offices Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load A of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle The Gross Vehicle Weight GVW includes the curb weight of the vehicle any cargo you may carry in it and the people who will be riding in the vehicle If you have a lot of options passengers or cargo in the vehicle it will reduce the tongue weight your vehicle can carry which will also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow And if you will tow a trailer you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight too Refer to Loading Your Vehicle in this section for more information about your vehicle s maximum load capacity
229. handling traction control and tire pressure monitoring performance The TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire s sidewall by the tire manufacturer If the tires have an all season tread design the TPC spec number will be followed by a MS for mud and snow Refer to Tire Side wall Labeling in this section for additional information 5 34 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE A WARNING Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving If you mix tires of different sizes brands or types radial and bias belted tires the vehicle may not handle properly and you could have a crash Using tires of different sizes brands or types may also cause damage to your vehi cle Be sure to use the correct size brand and type of tires on all wheels It is all right to drive with your com pact spare temporarily as it was developed for use on your vehicle Refer to Compact Spare Tire in this section A WARNING If you use bias ply tires on your vehi cle the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving A tire and or wheel could fail suddenly causing a crash Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle If you must replace your vehicle s tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec num ber make sure they are the same size load range speed rating and construction type radial and bias belted tires as your vehicle s original tires 5 35 Vehicles that have a t
230. harge is low the voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge back in When the state of charge is high the voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging If the vehi cle has a voltmeter gage or voltage display on the Driver Information Center DIC you may see the voltage move up or down This is normal If there is a problem an alert will be displayed The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high This is true for all vehicles This is because the gener ator alternator may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads A high electrical load occurs when several of the following loads are on headlamps high beams fog lamps rear window defog ger climate control fan at high speed heated seats engine cooling fans trailer loads and loads plugged into accessory power outlets EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery It does this by balancing the generator s output and the vehicle s electri cal needs It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power whenever needed It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories Normally these actions occur in steps or levels without being noticeable In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action this action may be noticeable to the driver If so a Driver Information Center DIC message might be displayed such as Bat
231. he current album begins to play Once all songs from that album are played the player moves to the next album in alpha betical order on the CD R and begin play ing MP3 files from that album 3 61 To exit music navigator mode press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD remains safely inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listen ing to the radio The CD icon and a mes sage showing disc and or track number appears on the display when a CD is in the player Press this button again and the sys tem automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player If a portable audio player is not con nected No Input Device Found displays Using an MP3 Radio with CD and DVD Player MP3 WMA CD R or CD RW Disc Com pressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio CDA files and MP3 WMA files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio CDA and ignores the MP3 WMA files on the DVD deck On the CD deck pressing the CAT button toggles between com pressed and uncompressed audio format the default being the uncompressed format CDA MP3 WMA Format If you burn your own MP3 WMA disc on a personal computer Make sure
232. he desired levels are obtained If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble To quickly adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position press the pushbut ton positioned under the BASS MID or TREB label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all tone and speaker con trols to the middle position press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds EQ Equalization Press this button to select preset equaliza tion settings To return to the manual mode press the EQ button until Manual displays or start to manually adjust the bass midrange or tre ble by pressing the tune knob Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust balance or fade press the tune knob until the speaker control labels appear on the display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting You can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK FWD or REV button until the desired levels are obtained To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position press the pushbutton posi tioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds You will hear a beep and the level will be adjusted to the middle position To quickly a
233. he shift lever button and move the shift lever 2 15 into another gear Refer to Shifting Out of Park P in this section REVERSE R Use this gear to back up CAUTION Shifting to REVERSE R while your vehicle is moving forward could dam age the transaxle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Shift to REVERSE R only after your vehicle is stopped To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow ice or sand without damaging the transaxle refer to If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand Mud Ice or Snow in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section NEUTRAL N In this position the engine does not con nect with the wheels To restart when the vehicle is already moving use NEUTRAL N only Also use NEUTRAL N when the vehicle is being towed WARNING Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed is dangerous Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal your vehicle could move very rapidly You could lose control and hit people or objects Do not shift into a drive gear while your engine is running at high speed CAUTION Shifting out of PARK P or NEUTRAL N while the engine is running at high speed may damage the tran saxle The repairs would not be cov ered by your warranty Be sure the engine is not running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle DRIVE D This position is for normal
234. he RKE transmitter ON default If it is dark enough outside the exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock button on the RKE trans mitter is pressed or the vehicle is no longer off Refer to Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation in Keys in the Features and Controls section for more information NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is dis played on the DIC to select it CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the vol ume level of the chime Press the vehicle information button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC dis play Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings NORMAL default The chime volume will be set to a normal level LOUD The chime volume will be set to a loud level NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is dis played on the DIC to select it REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature it allows you to turn the remote start off or on The remote start feature allows you to start the engine from outside of t
235. he TIN shows the manufac turer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread Quality Grading UTQG Tire manufacturers are required to 5 26 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE grade tires based on three perfor mance factors treadwear traction and temperature resistance For more information refer to Uniform Tire Quality Grading in this section Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load Compact Spare Tire Example 8 o lo S 8 g 4 6 5 gst B d 09 OL 1376093 Temporary Use Only The compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of approxi mately 3000 miles 5000 km and should not be driven at speeds over 65 mph 105 km h The compact spare tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat If your vehicle has a com pact spare tire refer to Compact 5 27 Spare Tire and If a Tire Goes Flat in this section Tire Ply Material The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread Tire Identification Number TIN The letters and numbers following the DOT Depart
236. he fuel tank is low on fuel When you add fuel the light should go off If it does not have your vehi cle serviced 3 26 INSTRUMENT PANEL Driver Information Center DIC Your vehicle has a Driver Information Cen ter DIC All messages will appear in the DIC display located in the center of the instrument panel cluster The DIC buttons are located on the center of the instrument panel The DIC comes on when the ignition is on After a short delay the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off The DIC displays trip fuel and vehicle sys tem information and warning messages if a system problem is detected The top of the DIC display shows the shift lever posi tion indicator Refer to Automatic Tran saxle Operation in Starting and Operating Your Vehicle in the Features and Controls section for more information If your vehicle has this feature the DIC also displays the outside air temperature when viewing the trip and fuel information If there is a problem with the system that controls the temperature display the num bers will be replaced with dashes If this occurs have the vehicle serviced by your dealer If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an extended period of time consult your dealer Under certain circum stances especially when the engine is idling a delay updating the temperature display is normal 3 27 The DIC als
237. he right front passenger seat is occu pied by a smaller person such as a child who has outgrown child restraints Or if there is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system When the right front passenger s frontal airbag has been turned off by the passen ger sensing system the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the air bag is off If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following the child restraint manufacturers directions and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position in this sec tion 1 40 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle the on indicator is still lit check to make sure that the vehi cle s seatback is not pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion If this hap pens slightly recline the vehicle s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint If this happens adjust the head restraint If the on indicator is still lit secure the child in the child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle if one is available and check with your dealer The passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the right front passengers frontal
238. he sound to fade in and out In addition driving or standing under heavy foliage bridges garages or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time The radio screen may display NO XM to indicate interference AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM especially at night The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other For better radio reception most AM radio stations will boost the power levels during the day and then reduce these levels during the night Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception When this happens try reducing the treble on your radio FM FM stereo will give the best sound but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles 16 to 65 km Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals causing the sound to fade in and out Care of Your CDs and DVDs Handle CDs carefully Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust The CD player scans the bottom surface of the disc If the surface of a CD is damaged Such as cracked broken or scratched the CD does not play properly or not at all If the surface of a CD is soiled take a soft lint free cloth or dampen a clean soft cloth in a mild neutral detergent solution mixed with water and clean it Make sure the wiping process starts from the center to the edge Do not touch the botto
239. he track number appears on the display The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R quality the method 3 52 INSTRUMENT PANEL of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There can be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled refer to Care of Your CDs and DVDs in this section for more information If there is no apparent damage try a known good CD CAUTION If a label is added to a CD or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs the CD player could be damaged While using the CD player use only CDs in good condition without any label load one CD at a time and keep the CD player and the loading slot free of foreign materials liquids and debris Do not add any label to a CD It could get caught in the CD player If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen If an error dis
240. he vehicle using your RKE transmitter Refer to Remote Vehicle Star under Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation in Keys INSTRUMENT PANEL in the Features and Controls section for more information Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE START appears on the DIC dis play Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OFF The remote start feature will be disabled ON default The remote start feature will be enabled NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is dis played on the DIC to select it FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the per sonalization features back to their factory default settings Press the vehicle information button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings RESTORE ALL default The personalization features will be set to their factory default settings 3 38 INSTRUMENT PANEL DO NOT RESTORE The personalization features will not be set to their factory default settings Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is dis
241. he video screen is in the DVD player mode pressing the AUX button on the remote control will switch the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary Refer to Radio with CD and DVD in this section for more information How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode normal full and Zoom screen brightness and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu To change any fea ture perform the following 1 Press the display menu button on the remote control 2 Use the remote control menu naviga tion arrows and the enter button to use the setup menu 3 Press the display menu button again to remove the setup menu from the Screen 3 69 Audio Output Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be heard through the following possible sources Wireless Headphones Vehicle Speakers The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal to the wireless headphones if there is audio available See Head phones earlier in this section for more information When a device is connected to the radio s auxiliary input jack if your vehicle has this feature or A V jacks the rear seat passen gers will be able to hear audio from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired headphones The front seat passen gers will be able to listen to playback f
242. hicle section 5 29 Occupant Distribution Designated seating positions Outward Facing Sidewall The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle The side of the tire that contains a whitewall bears white let tering or bears manufacturer brand and or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire Passenger P Metric Tire A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturers recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Refer to Inflation Tire Pressure in this section and Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehi cle in the Driving Your Vehicle section Radial Ply Tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread Rim A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead Speed Rating An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate Traction The friction between the tire and the road surface The amount of grip provided Tread The portion of a tire that comes into con tact with the road Treadwear Indicators Narrow bands sometime
243. hile it is dis played on the DIC to select it EXIT LIGHTING If it is dark enough outside this feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on This happens after the key is turned from RUN to LOCK Press the vehicle information button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC dis play Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lamps will not turn on 30 SECONDS default The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds 1 MINUTE The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute 2 MINUTES The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is dis played on the DIC to select it APPROACH LIGHTING This feature allows you to select whether or not to have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods after unlock ing the vehicle using the RKE transmitter Press the vehicle information button until APPROACH LIGHTING appears on the DIC display Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OFF The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock the vehicle with t
244. hill and if you are pulling a trailer also refer to Towing a Trailer in Towing in the Driving Your Vehicle section Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror To adjust the angle of the mirror move the mirror to a position that allows you see to out of the back window To adjust the height of the mirror adjust the arm that connects the mirror to the windshield To reduce glare from lights behind you move the lever toward you to the night position Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror If the vehicle has this feature the auto matic dimming mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize glare at night from lights behind your vehicle 5 On Off This is the on off button A light near the on off button will come on to indicate the automatic dimming is on If the automatic dimming function is off press and hold the on off button for four seconds to manually turn the system back on Cleaning the Mirror When cleaning the mirror use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror hous ing Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with Compass Your vehicle may have an automatic dim ming rearview mirror with a compass Mirror Operation When turned on this mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize glare from any headlamps behind you after dark cy On Off This is the on off
245. ht will go out when the fog lamps are turned off Refer to Fog Lamps in this section for more information Cruise Control Light s 806861 This light comes on whenever you set the cruise control INSTRUMENT PANEL The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off Refer to Cruise Control in this section for more information Reduced Engine Power Light 1278022 Your vehicle has a reduced engine power light This light along with the service vehicle soon light will be displayed when a notice able reduction in the vehicle s performance may occur Stop the vehicle and turn off the ignition Wait for 10 seconds and restart your vehicle This may correct the condition Refer to Service Vehicle Soon Light in this section for more information The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed when the reduced engine power light is on but acceleration and speed may be reduced The performance may be reduced until the next time you drive your vehicle If this light stays on see your SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible for diagnosis and repair 3 24 INSTRUMENT PANEL Highbeam On Light 808597 This light comes on when the high beam headlamps are in use Refer to Headlamp High Low Beam Changer in this section Service All Wheel Drive Light 1710820 This light is located in the center of your instrument panel cluster This light and the SERVICE
246. hten the lights or to the left to dim them Dome Lamp The dome lamp switch has three positions Off The lamp will not come on as long as the switch is in this position AUTO Auto The lamp will come on when a door is opened Refer to Entry Lighting in this section On The lamp will stay on as long as the switch is in this position Entry Lighting If the dome lamp is in the AUTO position the dome lamp and the cargo lamp inside 3 8 INSTRUMENT PANEL your vehicle will come on when any door is opened In addition the light will come on when the remote keyless entry unlock but ton is pressed It will stay on for 20 sec onds or until a door is opened After the door is opened the light will remain on and stay on for 20 seconds after the doors are closed or until you put the key in the igni tion and turn the key to RUN Map Lamps 1788863 Your vehicle may have lamps located on the headliner above the rearview mirror Push on the lens in the lamp to turn them on and off 3 9 Cargo Lamp The cargo lamp is located over the rear compartment and is controlled by the dome lamp Refer to Dome Lamp in this section Electric Power Management The vehicle has Electric Power Manage ment EPM that estimates the battery s temperature and state of charge It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and extended life of the battery When the battery s state of c
247. iate child restraints Child Restraint Systems 1379317 An infant car bed A a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle is an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat sur face Make sure that the infant s head rests toward the center of the vehicle SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1383218 A rear facing infant seat B provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant The harness system holds the infant in place and in a crash acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint 1395252 A forward facing child seat C E provides restraint for the child s body with the har ness and also sometimes with surfaces such as T shaped or shelf like shields 1395258 A booster seat F G is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle s safety belt system Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner and some high back booster seats have a five point harness A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window 1 22 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Question How Should 1 Use a Child Restraint Answer A child restraint system is any device designed for use in a motor vehicle to restrain seat or position children A built in child restraint system is a permanent part of the motor vehicle An add on child restraint system is a portable one which is purchased by the v
248. icle After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash apply the brake pedal lightly until the brakes work normally Driving too fast through large water pud dles or even going through some car DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE washes can cause problems too The water may affect your brakes Try to avoid puddles But if you cannot try to slow down before you hit them Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough When your vehicle is hydroplaning it has little or no contact with the road Hydroplaning does not happen often But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road If you can see reflections from trees telephone poles or other vehicles and raindrops dimple the water s surface there could be hydroplaning Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning The best advice is to slow down when it is raining 4 10 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Driving Through Deep Standing Water CAUTION If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water water can come in through the engine s air intake and badly damage the engine Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your
249. icle Care Appearance Materials in this section Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the sur face or they could stain Dry the finish with a soft clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spot ting High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the vehicle Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses Use only lukewarm or cold water a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses Follow instruc tions under Washing Your Vehicle in this section Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer Refer to Vehi cle Care Appearance Materials in this section CAUTION Machine compounding or aggres sive polishing on a basecoat clearcoat paint finish may damage it Use only non abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle The vehicle has a basecoat clearcoat paint finish The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat clearcoat paint finish Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts ice melting agents road oil and tar tree sap bi
250. icle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle 2 Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake Refer to Parking Brake in Starting and Operating Your Vehicle in the Features and Controls section Do not use the accelerator pedal and be ready to turn off the engine immedi ately if it starts 3 Try to start the engine in each gear The vehicle should start only in PARK P or NEUTRAL N If the vehicle starts in any other position contact your dealer for service 6 14 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control System Check A WARNING When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the vehicle moves you or others could be injured 1 Before you start be sure you have enough room around the vehicle It should be parked on a level surface 2 Firmly apply the parking brake Refer to Parking Brake in Starting and Oper ating Your Vehicle in the Features and Controls section Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move 3 With the engine off turn the ignition to RUN but do not start the engine With out applying the regular brake try to move the shift lever out of PARK P with normal effort If the shift lever moves out of PARK P contact your dealer for service 6 15 Ignition Transaxle Lock Check While par
251. icle to alert police that you have been stopped by the snow Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you If you do not have blankets or extra clothing make body insulators from newspapers burlap bags rags floor mats anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your cloth ing to keep warm EE Lu i e um du M LE D 808411 You can run the engine to keep warm but be careful A WARNING Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle This can cause deadly CO carbon monoxide gas to get inside CO could overcome you and kill you You cannot see it or smell it so you might not know it is in your vehicle Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe And check around again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind This will help keep CO out Run your engine only as long as you must This saves fuel When you run the engine make it go a little faster than just idle That is push the accelerator slightly This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle and possibly for signal ing later on with your headlamps Let the heater run for a while Then shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat St
252. id Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system Also water does not clean as well as washer fluid Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it is very cold This allows for expansion if freezing occurs which could dam age the tank if it is completely full Do not use engine coolant anti freeze in your windshield washer It can damage your washer system and paint 5 17 Brakes Brake Fluid DOT 3 RR 809919 Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid Refer to Engine Compartment Overview in this section for the location of the reservoir There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear When new linings are put in the fluid level goes back up The other rea son is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system If it is you should have your brake system fixed since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes will not work well or will not work at all So it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid Adding brake fluid will not cor rect a leak If you add fluid when your lin ings are worn then you will have too much fluid when you get new brake linings You should add or remove brake fluid as nec essary only when work is done on the brak
253. iew eene Climate Controls eese nnne Warning Lights Gages and Indicators Driver Information Center DIC Audio System s 5 itii eee ene INSTRUMENT PANEL Instrument Panel Overview TTTTTITTITTIJ c 1732990 3 1 INSTRUMENT PANEL The main components of your instrument panel are the following the Hood in the Service and Appear ance Care section M Tilt Wheel Lever Refer to Tilt Wheel U Accessory Power Outlet Refer to Accessory Power Oultlet s in this section A B Air Outlets Refer to Outlet Adjust ment in this section Turn Signal Multifunction Lever Refer to Turn Signal Multifunction Lever in this section in this section N Horn Refer to Horn in this section Climate Controls If Equipped Refer to Climate Control System in this section or Automatic Climate Controls e ier alt to Cruise If Equipped Refer to Automatic Cli D Instrument Panel Cluster Refer to mate Control System in this section Windshield Wiper Washer Hazard Warning Flasher Hood Release Instrument Panel Cluster in this sec tion Audio Steering Wheel Controls Refer to Audio Steering Wheel Controls in this section Lever Refer to Windshie
254. if a trailer is left attached to a parked vehicle for long periods of time The vehicle must be driven to re level the vehicle If a self equalizing hitch is being used the vehicle should be driven approximately two miles 3 2 km with the trailer prior to adjusting leveling the hitch 4 21 Towing a Trailer A WARNING If you do not use the correct equip ment and drive properly you can lose control when you pull a trailer For example if the trailer is too heavy the brakes may not work well or even at all You and your passengers could be seriously injured Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehi cle CAUTION Pulling a trailer improperly can dam age your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty Always follow the instructions in this section and check with your dealer for more information about towing a trailer with your vehi cle To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle you should read the information in Weight of the Trailer that appears later in this section Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself Trailering means changes in handling acceleration braking durability and fuel economy Suc cessful safe trailering takes correct equip ment and it has to be used properly That is the reason for this sect
255. ignal well in advance Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer When you tow a trailer your vehicle has to have extra wiring The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change Properly hooked up the trailer lamps will also flash telling other drivers you are about to turn change lanes or stop DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE When towing a trailer the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out Thus you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not It s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade If you do not shift down you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well Parking on Hills WARNING You really should not park your vehi cle with a trailer attached on a hill If your rig something goes wrong could start to move People can be injured and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged But if you ever have to park your rig ona hill do the following 1 Apply your regular brakes but do not shift into PARK P yet 2 Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels 3 When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load 4 24 DRIVING YOUR VEHI
256. ild seat and an older child riding in a booster seat There is a label on your sun visor that says Never put a rear facing child seat in the front This is because the risk to the rear facing child is so great if the airbag deploys A WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the sys tem detects rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off If you need to secure a forward fac ing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passen ger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint never put a child in a rear facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the passenger airbag status indicator shows off and the airbag is off Here is why A WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or kil
257. ilure to keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause damage to the engine not covered by your war ranty Engine Coolant Level Check Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL coolant mixture if necessary Refer to Engine Coolant in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section for further details Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if necessary At Least Once a Month Tire Inflation Check Visually inspect your vehicle s tires and make sure they are inflated to the correct pressures Do not forget to check the spare tire Open the driver s door to find the Tire Information Placard which lists the recommended tire inflation pressures Check to make sure the spare tire is stored securely Refer to Changing a Flat Tire in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section Tire Wear Inspection Tire rotation may be required for high mile age highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service notification Check the tires for wear and if necessary rotate the tires Refer to Tire Inspection and Rota tion in Tires in the Service and Appear ance Care section MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check A WARNING When you are doing this inspection the vehicle could move suddenly If the veh
258. in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section and DIC Warnings and Messages in Driver Infor mation Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section for more information 1710823 This light will come on along with the ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF message when the rear drive system is overheating This light will turn off when the rear drive system cools down If this light stays on it must be reset To reset the light turn the ignition off and then back again If the light stays on see your dealer for service Refer to All Wheel Drive Off under DIC Warnings and Messages in Driver Infor mation Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section for more information Steering Power Steering If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the power steering sys tem is not functioning you can steer but it will take more effort Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reason able speed A lot of the driver lost control accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves Here is why DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Experienced driver or beginner each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it pos sible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels If there is no traction inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction If you ha
259. in the Driving Your Vehicle section for more information STABILITY CTRL Control OFF This message displays any time the Elec tronic Stability Control ESC system turns off When this message has been dis played ESC is no longer available to assist you with directional control of the vehicle Adjust your driving accordingly Refer to Electronic Stability Control in Your Driv ing the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section This message displays only while the igni tion is in RUN Any of the following conditions may cause the ESC system to turn off The ESC system is turned off by press ing and holding the traction control but ton Refer to Electronic Stability Control in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section for more information The battery is low There is an ESC system failure See your dealer for service STARTING DISABLD Disabled SER VICE THRTTLE Throttle This message displays if the starting of the engine is disabled due to the electronic throttle control system Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately This message only appears while the igni tion is in RUN and will not disappear until the problem is resolved This message cannot be acknowledged INSTRUMENT PANEL THEFT ATTEMPTED This message displays if the content theft deterrent system has detected a break in attempt while you were away from your
260. inal location on the vehicle with the good battery Use a remote positive termi nal if the vehicle has one Now connect the black negative cable to the negative terminal loca tion on the vehicle with the good bat tery Use a remote negative terminal 5 21 if the vehicle has one Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step The other end of the negative cable does not go to the dead battery It goes to a heavy unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative terminal on the vehicle with the dead battery i RX 1737506 Connect the other end of the negative cable at least 18 inches 45 cm away from the dead battery but not near engine parts that move The elec trical connection is just as good there and the chance of sparks getting back to the battery is much less 10 Now start the vehicle with the good bat tery and run the engine for a while 11 Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery If it will not start after a few tries it probably needs service CAUTION If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order electri cal shorting may occur and damage the vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal Jumper Cable Removal 812553
261. ing eene 5 51 Child Restraint Systems eene 1 21 INDEX Child Restraints eiecti teer 1 18 City Driving 25 Ernte 4 11 Cleaning Exterior Lamps Lenses 5 50 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle 5 48 Climate Controls eie Renten 3 10 Compact Spare Tire eese 5 47 Configurations for Use of Three Child Restraints 1 25 Configurations for Use of Two Child Restraints 1 24 Control of a Vehicle cessent 4 3 Convenience Net 2 23 Cooling System ecce ceceeeeeereeere nene nnana 5 13 Cruise Control 3 5 Cruise Control Light eese 3 24 Cupholder s tein uere Ene 2 21 D Daily Inspection Checklist 2 11 2 12 Delayed Locking 2 6 DIC Operation and Displays 3 27 DIC Vehicle Personalization eee 3 35 DIC Warnings and Messages 3 30 Doing Your Own Service Work eene 5 1 Dome
262. ing Transmitter s to Your Vehicle Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle If a transmitter is lost or stolen a replacement can be purchased through your dealer Remember to bring any addi tional transmitters so they can also be re 2 3 coded to match the new transmitter Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle The vehicle can have a maximum of four transmitters matched to it Or refer to Relearn Remote Key under DIC Oper ation and Displays in Driver Information Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters to your vehicle Battery Replacement Under normal use the battery in your RKE transmitter should last about four years The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work at the normal range in any loca tion If you have to get close to your vehi cle before the transmitter works it is probably time to change the battery CAUTION When replacing the battery use care not to touch any of the circuitry Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter To replace the battery in the RKE transmit ter do the following 1 Use a flat thin object to pry open the transmitter 1562525 2 Once the transmitter is separated use a pencil or similar object to remove the old battery Do not
263. ings and lines If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection delay your pass A broken center line usually indicates it is all right to pass providing the road ahead is clear Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity For one thing following too closely reduces your area of vision especially if you are following a larger vehicle Also you will not have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops Keep back a reasonable distance When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do not get too close Time your move so you will be increas ing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane If the way is clear to pass you will have a running start that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back And if something happens to cause you to can cel your pass you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle wait your turn But take care that someone is not trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehi cle Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot Check your vehicle s mirrors glance over your shoulder and start y
264. int finish can be damaged Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehi cle If you do wash it off immedi ately Refer to Washing Your Vehicle in this section Brake Wear Your vehicle has front and rear disc brakes Disc brake pads have built in wear indica tors that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly A WARNING The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well That could lead to an acci dent When you hear the brake wear warning sound have your vehicle serviced CAUTION Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation When tires are rotated inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications Brake pads should always be replaced as complete axle sets Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height or if there is a SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE rapid increase in pedal travel This could be a sign of brake trouble
265. ion In it are many time tested important trailering tips and safety rules Many of these are impor tant for your safety and that of your pas sengers So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer If you do here are some important points There are many different laws including speed limit restrictions having to do with trailering Make sure your rig will be legal not only where you live but also where you will be driving A good source for this information can be state or pro vincial police Consider using a sway control Refer to Hitches later in this section Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 800 km your new vehicle is driven Your engine axle or other parts could be damaged During the first 500 miles 800 km that you tow a trailer do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Three important considerations have to do with weight Weight of the trailer Weight of the trailer tongue Weight on your vehicle s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be Your vehicle can tow up to 2 900 Ibs 1300 kg with up to five occupants or up to 3 500 Ibs 1575 kg with up to two occupants But even that can be too heavy It depends on how you plan to use your rig For example speed altitude road
266. ion about that label is dis played INSTRUMENT PANEL When information is not available No Info displays Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked Tune to your favorite stations using the presets favorites button and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them Refer to Defensive Driving in Your Driv ing the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section FAV Favorites A maximum of 36 stations can be pro grammed as favorites using the six push buttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button FAV button Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of FM or XM if equipped stations To store a station as a favorite perform the following steps 1 Tune to the desired radio station 2 Press the FAV button to display the page where you want the station stored 3 Press and hold one of the six pushbut tons until a beep sounds Whenever that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 3 50 INSTRUMENT PANEL 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station you want stored as a favor ite The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button To setup the number
267. ip ment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maxi mum amperage rating Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible with the accessory power out lets and could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses If you experience a prob lem see your dealer for additional informa tion on the accessory power outlet CAUTION Adding any electrical equipment to your vehicle may damage it or keep other components from working as they should The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes Check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment When adding electrical equipment be sure to follow the installation instructions included with the equipment CAUTION Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug because the power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only INSTRUMENT PANEL Climate Controls Automatic Climate Control System With this system you can control the heat ing cooling and ventilation for the vehicle Automatic Climate Control System 1824513 3 10 INSTRUMENT PANEL Automatic Climate Control System with Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Sys tem 1732674 Automatic Operation AUTO Automatic Fan When this position is selected
268. iper away from the rear win dow 3 Pull up the release clip located at the connecting point of the blade and the arm Then pull the blade assembly down toward the glass to remove it from the wiper arm 4 Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm until you hear the release clip click into place 5 Push the release clip from Step 3 down to secure the wiper blade into place Tires Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service see your Suzuki Warranty booklet for details For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer s booklet included with your vehicle A WARNING Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction You could have an air out and a serious accident Refer to Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehi cle in the Driving Your Vehicle section Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires The resulting accident could cause serious injury Check all tires fre quently to maintain the recom mended pressure Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut punctured or broken by a sudden impact such as when you hit a pothole Keep tires at the rec ommended pressure
269. ir pressure level as indicated on the tire and loading information label 12 Put the valve caps back on the valve stems Federal Communications Commission FCC and Industry and Science Canada The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and com plies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Oper 5 33 ation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS operates on a radio frequency and com plies with RSS 210 of Industry and Sci ence Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause interfer ence 2 This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equip ment Tire Inspection and Rotation Tires should be rotated every 5000 to 8000 miles 8000 to 13000 km Any time you notice unusual wear rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment Also check for damaged tires or wheels Refer to When It Is Time for New Tires and Wheel Replacement in this section for more information The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear
270. ire pressure monitor ing system may give an inaccurate low pressure warning if Non TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle Non TPC Spec rated tires may give a low pres sure warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires Refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in this section Your vehicle s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label This label is attached to the vehi cle s center pillar B pillar Refer to Load ing Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label Different Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a differ ent size than your original equipment wheels and tires this may affect the way your vehicle performs including its brak ing ride and handling characteristics sta bility resistance rollover Additionally if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti lock brakes traction control and electronic stability control the performance of these systems can be affected A WARNING If you add different sized wheels your vehicle may not provide an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected You may increase the chance that you will crash and suffer serious injury Only use Suz
271. ities and Specifications in this section for wheel nut torque specification SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE CAUTION Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage To avoid expensive brake repairs evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification Refer to Capacities and Specifications in this section for the wheel nut torque specification e Q 808642 13 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a criss cross sequence as shown 14 Lower the jack all the way and remove the jack from under the vehicle 15 Tighten the wheel nuts firmly with the wheel wrench 5 42 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Secondary Latch System Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a sec ondary latch system It is designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly fall ing off your vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged For the secondary latch to work the tire must be stowed with the valve stem pointing down Refer to Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools in this section for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly A WARNING Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt Read and follow the instructions listed next A WARNING
272. iven without refueling The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle s fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank This esti mate will change if driving conditions change For example if driving in traffic and making frequent stops this display may read one number but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank This is because dif ferent driving conditions produce different fuel economies Generally freeway driving INSTRUMENT PANEL produces better fuel economy than city driving If your vehicle is low on fuel the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will be displayed Refer to FUEL LEVEL LOW under DIC Warnings and Messages in this section for more information Blank Display This display shows no information 3 28 INSTRUMENT PANEL Vehicle Information Menu Items wii Vehicle Information 2 Press this button to scroll through the fol lowing displays OIL LIFE Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays This dis play shows an estimate of the oil s remain ing useful life If you see 99 OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display that means 99 of the current oil life remains The engine oil life system will alert you to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions When the remaining oil life is low the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
273. jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate This is not an audio output do not plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack However an external audio device such as an iPod laptop com puter MP3 player CD player or cassette tape player etc can be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio listening Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxil iary device while the vehicle is in PARK P Refer to Defensive Driving in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section for more information on driver distraction To use a portable audio player connect a 1 8 inch 3 5 mm cable to the radio s front auxiliary input jack While a device is con nected the radio automatically begins playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers To listen to a device through the rear auxil iary input over the speakers cycle the DVD CD Aux button on the radio faceplate until Rear Aux Input displays on the radio The RSA or DVD Screen must be on in order for the radio to source to rear auxil iary Power Volume Turn this knob clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player Additional volume adjustments might be needed from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft enough BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing The por table audio
274. k pickup bed or on any sur face other than the ground Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle Contact should be maintained until the fill ing is complete Do not smoke while pumping gaso line Do not use a cellular phone while pumping gasoline 5 4 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Checking Things Under the Hood Release Before closing the hood be sure all the Hood To open the hood do the following filler caps are on properly Then pull the hood down and close it firmly A WARNING An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan 1617949 1 Pull the handle with this symbol on it It is located inside the vehicle to the left WARNING of the steering column Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire These include liquids like fuel oil coolant brake fluid windshield washer and other fluids and plastic or rubber You or others could be burned Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine 1733505 2 Then go to the front of the vehicle and release the secondary hood release by pushing the lever up 3 Lift the hood 5 5 Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood here is what you will see SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE
275. ked and with the parking brake set try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK P The ignition key should come out only in LOCK Contact your dealer if service is required Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle Park P Mechanism Check WARNING When you are doing this check your vehicle could begin to move You or others could be injured and property could be damaged Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move Park on a fairly steep hill with the vehicle facing downhill Keeping your foot on the regular brake set the parking brake To check the parking brake s holding ability With the engine running and tran saxle in NEUTRAL N slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only To check the PARK P mechanism s holding ability With the engine running shift to PARK P Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake Contact your dealer if service is required Underbody Flushing Service At least every spring use plain water to flush any corrosive materials such as win ter road salt from the underbody Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE R
276. key menu appears and allows naviga tion of the disc The menu reads left to right as RDM Randomize song play order a Folder icon with left and right arrows to move up or down through avail able folders a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available and a Music Navigator tag If a Playlist tag is shown toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey only or the menu as previously described If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD R in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD R starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source 3 62 INSTRUMENT PANEL As each new track starts to play the track number and song title displays The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CD Rs with an adapter ring Full size CD Rs and the smaller CD Rs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality can be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There can be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or difficulty in loading and ejecting If these problems occur check the bottom surface of the CD If the surface of the CD is damaged such as cracked broken or scratched the CD will not play properly If the surface of the CD is soiled refer to Care of Your CDs and DVDs in this section for more information If there
277. ks when the informa tion is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters display In rare cases a radio station could broadcast incorrect informa tion that causes the radio features to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station XM Satellite Radio Service XM M is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada XM offers a large variety of coast to coast channels including music news sports talk traffic weather U S subscribers and children s programming XM M provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the XM service For more information contact XM In the U S at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 or in Canada at www xmradio ca or call 1 877 GET XMSR 438 9677 Playing the Radio 5 Power Volume Press this knob to turn the system on and off Turn this knob clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease the volume Speed Compensated Volume SCV The radio has Speed Compensated Vol ume SCV While SCV is on the radio vol ume automatically adjusts to compensate for road and wind noise as driving speed changes That way the volume level should sound about the same as you drive To activate SCV 1 Set the radio volume to the desired level 2 Press the MENU button to display the
278. l Example TIRE AND LOADING INFORM ITION SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL FRONT REAR The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs COLD TIRE PRESSURE SEE QWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1556694 A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Infor mation label is attached to the vehicle s center pillar B pillar With the driver s door open you will find the label attached below the door lock post striker The tire and loading information label lists the num ber of occupant seating positions A and the maximum vehicle capacity weight B in kilograms and pounds The vehicle capacity weight includes the weight of all occupants cargo and all nonfactory installed options The Tire and Loading Information label also lists the tire size of the original equip ment tires C and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures D For more infor mation on tires and inflation refer to Tires in the Service and Appearance Care sec 4 17 tion and Inflation Tire Pressure in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care sec tion There is also important loading information on the Certification Tire label It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR and the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR for the front and rear axles See Certifica tion Tire Label later in this section Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement
279. l airbags which adjust the restraint according to crash severity Your vehicle has electronic frontal sensors which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact For moderate frontal impacts these airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment For more severe frontal impacts full deployment occurs If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not move or deform the threshold level for the reduced deployment is about 11 to 16 mph 17 to 26 km h and the threshold level for a full deployment is about 20 to 25 mph 32 to 40 km h The threshold level can vary however with specific vehicle design so that it can be somewhat above or below this range Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds For example f the vehicle hits a stationary object the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits a moving object f the vehicle hits an object that deforms the airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform f the vehicle hits a narrow object like a pole the airbags could inflate at a differ ent crash speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object like a wall f the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the airbags could inflate at a differ ent crash speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the object The frontal airbags driver a
280. ld Wipers in this section Button Refer to Hazard Warning Flashers in this section Audio System Refer to Audio Sys tem s in this section Glove Box Refer to Glove Box in Storage Areas in the Features and Controls section Power Mirror Control Refer to Out side Power Mirrors in Mirrors in the Features and Controls section Instrument Panel Brightness Control Refer to Instrument Panel Bright ness in this section Refer to Hood Release in Checking Things Under Heated Seats Buttons If Equipped Refer to Heated Seats in Front Seats in the Seats and Restraint Systems section Driver Information Center Controls Refer to DIC Operation and Displays in this section Rear Window Wiper Washer Buttons Refer to Rear Win dow Wiper Washer in this section Fog Lamps Button Refer to Fog Lamps in this section Power Window Switches Refer to Power Windows in Windows in the Features and Controls section Traction Control System Button Refer to Traction Control System TCS in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section Shift Lever Refer to Shifting Into Park P in Starting and Operating Your Vehicle in the Features and Controls section Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Refer to Passenger Airbag Status Indicator in this section INSTRUMENT PANEL Hazard Warning Flashers
281. ld restraint has the LATCH sys tem refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH in this section There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating position Do not secure a child seat in this position if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored Refer to Lower Anchors Tethers for Children LATCH in this section if the child restraint has a top tether You will be using the lap shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instruc tions say 1 Your vehicle has a right front passen ger s frontal airbag Refer to Passen ger Sensing System in this section We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat even if the airbag is off If your child restraint is for ward facing move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the child restraint in this seat Refer to Manual Seats in this section When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passen ger s frontal airbag the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to RUN or START Refer to Passenger Airbag Status Indicator in Warning Lights Gages and Indica
282. led if the right front passengers airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Be sure the airbag is off before using a rear facing child restraint in the right front seat position Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the passenger s frontal airbag if the sys tem detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be trans ported in vehicles with a rear seat that will accommodate a rear facing child restraint whenever possible If you need to secure a forward fac ing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passen ger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passen ger s frontal airbag if The right front passenger seat is unoc cupied The system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat The system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint The system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat A right front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time T
283. list When the last track of the last playlist has played play continues from the first track of the first playlist Play begins from the first track in the first folder continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode was chosen as the default display The new track name displays File System and Naming The song name that is displayed is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name without the extension such as mp3 as the track name INSTRUMENT PANEL Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename displays Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp MusicMatch or Real Jukebox software can be accessed however they cannot be edited using the radio These playlists are treated as spe cial folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 in either the DVD or CD slot Insert a CD R partway into either the top or bottom slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R should begin playing Depending on the format of the disc a soft
284. lls you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your vehi cle s speed When going downhill you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to limit the vehicle s speed Of course apply ing the brakes ends cruise control Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills Ending Cruise Control There are three ways to end cruise control Step lightly on the brake pedal Press the cancel button on the steering wheel Press the On Off button on the steering wheel Erasing Speed Memory When the cruise control or the ignition is turned off the cruise control set speed memory is erased 3 7 Headlamps The exterior lamp control is located on the turn signal multifunction lever XX Exterior Lamp Control Turn the control with this symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps The exterior lamp control has the following positions AUTO Off Automatic Headlamps Turn the control to this position to put the headlamps in automatic mode Automatic mode will turn the exterior lamps on and off depending upon how much light is avail able outside of the vehicle 100 Parking Lamps Turn the control to this position to turn on the parking lamps together with the follow ing Sidemarker Lamps Taillamps License Plate Lamps Instrument Panel Lights Z D Headlamps Turning the control to this position turns on the headlamps together with the previ ou
285. ly will be there to help protect you in a collision After a crash you may need to replace the driver and front passengers safety belt retractor assemblies even if the frontal air bags have not deployed The driver and front passengers safety belt retractor assemblies contain the safety belt preten sioners Have your safety belt pretension ers checked if your vehicle has been in a collision or if your airbag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving Refer to Airbag Readiness Light in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section FEATURES AND CONTROLS FEATURES AND CONTROLS K OyS E E E ssecuncsedencdusutuidanediiensceseadacuacnauerstenetan 2 1 Doors and Locks 2 5 PLNS WINKOWS 2 8 Theft Deterrent Systems esee 2 9 Daily Inspection Checklist 2 11 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 12 ee 2 20 Storage Areas asassansnunnonnnnnnunnannnnnnunnannnnnnunnonnnnnnnnnannnnnnanne 2 21 SunrOOf in eec inae dir si desl 2 24 FEATURES AND CONTROLS Keys WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or e
286. m side of a CD while handling it this could damage the surface Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge Care of the CD and DVD Player The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism INSTRUMENT PANEL Multi Band Antenna The multi band antenna is located on the roof of your vehicle This type of antenna is used with the AM FM radio and the XMTM Satellite Radio Service System Keep this antenna clear of snow and ice build up for clear radio reception If your vehicle has a sunroof the perfor mance of the radio system may be affected if the sunroof is open The roof rack crossrails may cause inter ference with the radio reception if items are kept in the rear most position Keep objects that have been loaded on the roof of the vehicle at least one foot 0 31 meter away from the antenna Make sure the multi band antenna is not obstructed 3 74 INSTRUMENT PANEL DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle 4 1 TOWING e E E 4 20 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle Defensive Driving The best advice anyone can give about driving is Drive defensively Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle Buckle up Refer to Safety Belts They Are for Everyon
287. mage them Your vehicle s systems can interfere with the operation of sound equip ment that has been added Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory Power RAP With RAP the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off Refer to Retained Accessory Power RAP in Starting and Operating Your Vehicle in the Features and Controls section for more information Setting the Time without date display If your vehicle has an AM FM base radio with a single CD player and preset buttons numbered one through six the radio will have a clock button for setting the time You can set the time by following these steps 1 Press the clock button until the hour numbers begin flashing on the display Press the clock button a second time and the minute numbers will begin flashing on the display 2 While either the hour or the minute numbers are flashing turn the tune knob located on the upper right side of the radio clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease the time Instead of using the tune knob you can also press the SEEK FWD forward or REV reverse buttons to adjust the time 3 Press the clock button again until the clock display stops flashing to set the currently displayed time otherwise the flashing will stop after five seconds and the current time displayed will be auto matically set To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour press the clo
288. map 806305 2 Press and hold the on off button for six seconds Release the button when 2 20 FEATURES AND CONTROLS ZONE is displayed The number shown is the current zone number 3 Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in the compass temperature window on the mirror by pressing the on off button Once you find your zone number release the button After about four seconds the mirror will return to the compass display and the new zone number will be set Outside Power Mirrors 1262035 The controls for the power mirrors are located on the instrument panel To adjust the mirrors do the following 1 Move the selector switch to the left or right to choose the driver s or passen ger s mirror 2 21 2 Press the corresponding edges of the round control pad to move each mirror to the desired direction Adjust each outside mirror so that you can see a little of your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle Outside Convex Mirrors The passenger s side mirror is convex A convex mirror s surface is curved creating a wider area of vision for the driver WARNING A convex mirror can make things like other vehicles look farther away than they really are If you cut too sharply into the right lane you could hit a vehicle on your right Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes Storage Areas Glove Box To open the glo
289. may find that your vehicle s right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driv ing 810696 If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement recovery should be fairly easy Ease off the accelerator and then if there is nothing in the way steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway Passing The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment accelerates moves around the vehicle ahead then goes back into the right lane again A simple maneu ver Not necessarily Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dan gerous move since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traf fic for several seconds A miscalculation an error in judgment or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents the head on collision So here are some tips for passing Drive ahead Look down the road to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass wait for a bet ter time Watch for traffic signs pavement mark
290. mber of files folders playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file folder or playlist name Long names also take up more space on the display potentially getting cut off Finalize the audio disc before you burn it Trying to add music to an existing disc may cause the disc not to function in the player 3 58 INSTRUMENT PANEL You can change playlists by using the pre vious and next folder buttons the tuner knob or the seek buttons You can also play an MP3 CD R that was recorded using no file folders If a CD R contains more than the maximum of 50 folders 15 playlists and 512 folders and files the player lets you access and navigate up to the maximum but all items over the maxi mum are not accessible Root Directory The root directory of the CD R is treated as a folder If the root directory has com pressed audio files the directory is dis played as the CD label All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory fold ers However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio CDA and MP3 files a folder under the root directory called CD access all of the CD audio tracks on the disc Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists some where in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to
291. me cities Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal Content Theft Deterrent To activate the theft deterrent system 1 Open the door 2 Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter If you are using the remote keyless entry transmitter the door does not need to be open 3 Close all doors Once armed the alarm will go off if some one tries to enter the vehicle without using the remote keyless entry transmitter or a key or turns the ignition on with an incor rect key The horn will sound and the turn signal lamps will flash for approximately two minutes When the alarm is armed the trunk may be opened with the remote keyless entry transmitter The power door lock switches are disabled and the doors remain locked You must use your remote keyless entry transmitter or your key to unlock the doors when the system is armed Arming with the Power Lock Switch The alarm system will arm when you use either power lock switch to lock the doors while any door or the trunk is open and the key is removed from the ignition Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter The alarm system will arm when you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors if the key is not in the igni tion Disarming with the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter The alarm system will disarm when you use your
292. me with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet or both and to this manual The child restraint instructions are important so if they are not available obtain a replacement copy from the manu facturer Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehi cle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint There are several systems for securing the child within the child restraint One system the three point harness has straps that come down over each of the infant s shoul ders and buckle together at the crotch The five point harness system has two shoul der straps two hip straps and a crotch strap A shield may take the place of hip straps A T shaped shield has shoulder straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the child s body A shelf or armrest type shield has straps that are attached to a wide shelf like shield that swings up or to the side A WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Make sure the child is prop erly secured following the instruc tions that came with that restraint Because there are different systems it is important to refer to the instructions that come with the restraint A child can be e
293. ment To change the batteries do the following 1 Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver to loosen then slide open the battery door located on the left side of the headphones 2 Replace the two batteries in the com partment Make sure that they are installed correctly using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment 3 Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw INSTRUMENT PANEL If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time remove the batteries and keep them in a cool dry place Audio Video A V Jacks 1676611 The AN jacks are located on the rear of the floor console The A V jacks allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a cam corder or a video game unit to the RSE system Adapter connectors or cables may be required to connect the auxiliary device to the A V jacks Refer to the manufac turer s instructions for proper usage The A V jacks are color coded to match typical home entertainment system equip ment The yellow jack A is for the video input The white jack B is for the left audio input The red jack C is for the right audio input 3 68 INSTRUMENT PANEL Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio system To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE sys tem connect an external auxiliary device to the color coded A V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on If t
294. ment of Transportation code is the Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN shows the manufac turer and plant code tire size and date the tire was manufactured The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire although only one side may have the date of manufacture Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load Tire Inflation The temporary use tire or compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi 420 kPa For more information on tire pressure and inflation refer to Inflation Tire Pressure in this sec tion Tire Size A combination of letters and numbers define a tire s width height aspect ratio construction type and service description The letter T as the first character in the tire size means the tire is for temporary use only TPC Spec Tire Performance Criteria Specification Original equipment tires designed to SUZUKI s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall SUZUKI s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines Tire Size The following illustration shows an exam ple of a typical passenger vehicle tire size P225 60R16 97S HT D 1376101 A Passenger P Metric Tire The United States version of a metric tire sizing system The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engi
295. mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater If you have not found a problem yet but core or radiator corrosion In addi the coolant level is not at the cold fill line cooling system A WARNING Heater and radiator hoses and other engine parts can be very hot Do not touch them If you do you can be burned Do not run the engine if there is a leak If you run the engine it could lose all coolant That could cause an engine fire and you could be burned Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle tion the engine coolant could require changing sooner at 30000 miles 50000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free cool ant in your vehicle add a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank Refer to Engine Coolant in this section for more informa tion CAUTION In cold weather water can freeze and crack the engine radiator heater core and other parts Use the recom mended coolant and the proper cool ant mixture 5 14 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE How to Add Coolant to the Cooling Sys 2 Then keep turning the pressure cap A WARNING tem and remove it CAUTION You can be burned if you spill cool ant on hot engine parts Coolant con WARNING tai
296. n a Rear Seat Position 1 29 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat POSITION iius ieri Lena cria d aca cia noD RE uS uade 1 31 Securing an Add on Child Restraint in the Vehicle 1 23 Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint 1 23 Security Light euren 3 24 Service iue edes iie eiiis 5 1 Service All Wheel Drive Light eese 3 25 Service Parts Identification Label 5 53 Service Vehicle Soon Light eere 3 26 Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle 1 42 Sheet Metal Damage eere 5 51 Shifting Into Park P 2 17 Shifting Out of Park P eren 2 18 Speedometer and Odometer 3 15 Split Folding the Second Row Seat 1 6 Starting and Operating Your Vehicle 2 12 Starting the Engine eene 2 13 IIR M 4 6 Storage Areas arce tented 2 21 Storing a Full Sized Flat Tire sess 5 46 SUM VISONS A 2 9 Eigpllme ceu 2 24 T Tachometer elt hans 3 16 Taillamps Turn Signal Stoplamps and Back up Lamps sebeiieccede
297. n the passenger s side of the engine com partment near the radiator 3 Plug it into a normal grounded 110 volt AC outlet WARNING Plugging the into ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock Also the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire You could be seriously injured Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong 110 volt AC outlet If the cord will not reach use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps 4 Before starting the engine be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts If you do not it could be damaged How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in The answer depends on the outside temperature the kind of oil you have and some other things Instead of trying to list everything here we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you will be parking your vehicle The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area FEATURES AND CONTROLS Automatic Transaxle Operation The shift lever for the automatic transaxle is located on the console between the seats Maximum engine speed is limited when the vehicle is in PARK P or NEUTRAL N to protect driveline components from improper operation PRNDM j 1722684 There are several different positions for the shift lever When using the manual shift mode a number will als
298. n those who are wearing safety belts Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts Lap Shoulder Belt All rear seat positions have lap shoulder belts Here is how to wear one properly 1 15 1378723 1 Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you Do not let it get twisted The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly If this happens let the belt go back slightly to unlock it Then pull the belt across you more slowly 2 Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way it will lock If it does let it go back all the way and start again If the belt is not long enough refer to Safety Belt Extender in this section Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to 1378907 3 To make the lap part tight pull up on the shoulder part 805902 The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips just touching the thighs In a crash this applies force to the strong pelvic bones And you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt If you slid under it the belt would apply for
299. nd right front passenger are not intended to inflate dur ing vehicle rollovers rear impacts or in many side impacts Your vehicle has roof mounted rollover air bags and a rollover sensor Refer to Air bag System in this section These rollover capable airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact A roof mounted rollover airbag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system s designed threshold level The threshold level can vary with specific vehi cle design Roof mounted rollover airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts Both roof mounted rollover airbags will deploy when either side of the vehicle is struck or during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact In any particular crash no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were For frontal airbags inflation is determined by what the vehicle hits the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down For roof mounted rollover airbags inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact or a rollover event What Makes an Airbag Inflate In an impact of sufficient severity the air bag sensing system detects that the vehi cle is in a crash In the case of a roof mounted rollover airbag the sensing sys tem detects that the vehicle is about to roll over or ha
300. ndangered in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint Where to Put the Restraint Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat We recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear seat including an infant riding in a rear facing infant seat a child riding in a for ward facing child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat Here is why A WARNING A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Even though the passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the right front passenger s frontal airbag if the system detects a rear facing child restraint no system is fail safe and no one can guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance even though it is turned off We recommend that rear facing child restraints be secured in the rear seat even if the airbag is off Continued A WARNING Continued If you need to secure a forward fac ing child restraint in the right front seat always move the front passen ger seat as far back as it will go It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat There is limited space in
301. neered to standards set by the U S Tire and Rim Association Tire Width The three digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall Aspect Ratio A two digit number that indicates the tire height to width measurements For example if the tire size aspect ratio is 60 as shown in item C of the illustration it would mean that the tire s sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide Construction Code A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire The letter R means radial ply construction the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction and the letter B means belted bias ply construction Rim Diameter Diameter of the wheel in inches Service Description These characters represent the load range and speed rating of the tire The load index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified to carry The load index can range from 1 to 279 The speed rating is the max imum speed a tire is certified to carry a load Speed ratings range from A to Z Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch psi or kilopascal kPa Accessory Weight This means the combined weight of optional accessories Some examples of optional accessories are automatic trans mission transaxle power steering power br
302. ng cleaners read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label While cleaning your vehicle s interior maintain adequate ventilation by opening your vehicle s doors and windows Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs using a small brush with soft bristles Your SUZUKI dealer has a product for cleaning your vehicle s glass Should it become necessary you can also obtain a product from your SUZUKI dealer to remove odors from your vehicle s uphol stery Do not clean your vehicle using the follow ing cleaners or techniques Never use a knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Never use a stiff brush It can cause damage to your vehicle s interior sur faces Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively with a cleaning cloth Use of heavy pressure can damage your interior and does not improve the effec tiveness of soil removal Use only mild neutral pH soaps Avoid laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers Using too much soap will leave a residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt For liquid clean ers about 20 drops per gallon 3 78 L of water is a good guide Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while cleaning Damage to your vehicle s interior may result from the use of many organic sol vents such as naptha alcohol etc Fabric Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently t
303. ni 2 12 FEATURES AND CONTROLS tion and park your vehicle a chime will Starting the Engine after 15 seconds to prevent cranking sound when you open the drivers door Place the transaxle in the proper gear motor damage To prevent gear dam Always remember to remove your key from age this system also prevents cranking the ignition and take it with you This will lever to if the engine is already running Engine lock your ignition and transaxle Also N Your engine will not start in any cranking can be stopped by turning the always remember to lock the doors other position this is a safety feature To ignition switch to the ACC or LOCK restart when you are already moving use The battery could be drained if you leave NEUTRAL only the key in the ignition while your vehicle is parked You may not be able to start your CAUTION Shifting into PARK P with the vehi position CAUTION vehicle after it has been parked for an extended period of time Cranking the engine for long periods of time by returning the key to the START position immediately after cle moving could damage the tran saxle Shift into PARK P only when Retained Accessory Power RAP your vehicle is stopped The vehicle has Retained Accessory cranking has ended can overheat and damage the cranking motor and Power RAP which will allow your vehi drain the battery Wait at least 15 sec cle s radio and windo
304. nition off Then start the engine again to reset the system If the light still stays on or comes on again while you are driv ing your vehicle needs service If the regu lar brake system warning light is not on you still have brakes but you do not have anti lock brakes If the regular brake sys tem warning light is also on you do not have anti lock brakes and there is a prob lem with your regular brakes Refer to Brake System Warning Light in this sec tion for more information The ABS warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN If the light does not come on then have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem Traction Control System TCS Warning Light ee 1545635 Your vehicle has a traction control system warning light This light will come on when your traction control system is limiting wheel spin You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal This light may also come on after extended heavy braking indicating the brakes have become too hot to limit wheel spin If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on your vehicle needs service Refer to Traction Control System TCS in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the INSTRUMENT PANEL Driving Your Vehicle section for more information Engine Coolant Temperature W
305. nnected No Aux displays Radio with CD MP3 640 Mi 680 Y 750 Y 96 77 98 5 Y X8 Y X41 9 380 1546891 Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data Sys tem RDS The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only works when the informa tion is available While the radio is tuned to an FM RDS station the station name or call letters appear on the display In rare cases a radio station may broadcast incor rect information that causes the radio fea tures to work improperly If this happens contact the radio station INSTRUMENT PANEL XM Satellite Radio Service XM M is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada XM offers a large variety of coast to coast channels including music news sports talk traffic weather U S subscribers and children s programming XM M provides digital quality audio and text information that includes song title and artist name A service fee is required in order to receive the service For more information contact XM In the U S at www xmradio com or call 1 800 852 XMXM 9696 or in Canada at www xmradio ca or call 1 877 GET XMSR 438 9677 Playing the Radio 5 Power Volume Press this knob to turn the system on and off Turn this knob clockwise or counterclo
306. not a system with a negative 12 volt ground both vehicles can be dam A WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Vehicle Storage If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more remove the black negative cable from the battery This will help keep your battery from running down A WARNING Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode You can be badly hurt if you are not careful Refer to Jump Starting in this sec tion for tips on working around a bat tery without getting hurt You must close all doors and the liftgate before reconnecting the battery After reconnecting the battery you must press the unlock button on the key transmitter Failure to follow this procedure may result in sounding an alarm Pressing unlock on the key transmitter would stop the alarm 5 19 WARNING Batteries can hurt you They be dangerous because They contain acid that can burn you They contain gas that can explode or ignite They contain enough electricity to burn you If you do not follow these steps exactly some or all of these things can hurt you CAUTION Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that would not be covered by your war ranty Trying to s
307. ns ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine When the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is at the cold fill line start the vehicle If the overheat warning continues there is one more thing you can try You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator but be sure the system is cool before you do it A WARNING Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly They are under pres sure and if you turn the radiator pressure cap even little they can come out at high speed Never turn the cap when the cooling system including the radiator pressure cap is hot Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap 5 15 Your engine has a specific cooling system drain and fill procedure Fail ure to follow this procedure could cause your engine to overheat and be severely damaged If your engine s cooling system needs to be drained and re filled please see your dealer A OPEN s sO SURGE RESERVOIR TANK D EXPANSION 15 5 105 KPa DA y v DEX COOl e 809006 1 You can remove the pressure cap when the cooling system including the pressure cap and upper radiator hose is no longer hot Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise If you hear a hiss wait for that to s
308. nt could strike someone Store all these in the proper place A WARNING The underbody mounted spare tire 806548 1613524 needs to be stored with the valve 8 Grasp the spare tire with both hands 10 Tilt the retainer and slip it through the ae cai NS and pull it out from under the vehicle wheel opening when the spare tire has upward its se ondarvy lat E d 9 Reach under the vehicle and remove been completely lowered uL HC BE s a Mos ie tis the wheel wrench and jack 11 Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the S Spare could loosen and suddenly fall from your vehicle If this happened when Have the hoist assembly inspected as your vehicle was being driven the soon as you can You will not be able to tire might contact a person or store a spare tire using the hoist assembly another vehicle causing injury and until it has been repaired or replaced of course damage to itself as well Be sure the underbody mounted spare tire is stored with its valve stem pointing down cable back up if the cable is hanging 5 44 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Follow this diagram to store the under body mounted spare tire 1218662 A Wheel Wrench B Hoist Shaft C Secondary Retainer D Spare Tire Valve Stem Pointed Down 5 45 1 2 3 Put the tire D on the ground at the rear of the vehicle Ensure the valve stem is pointed down and to the rear
309. o a cor rosive environment such as winter road salt Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer seal better and not stick or squeak Inspect passenger compart ment air filter Replace the air filter if necessary If you drive regularly under dusty conditions the filter may require replacement more often Inspect throttle system Check system for interference or binding and for damaged or missing parts Replace parts as needed Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear 6 5 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Additional Required Services except CANADA The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service I or 11 after the indicated miles kilometers shown for each item Additional required services Service Instruction Miles Kilometers 25000 40000 50000 80000 75000 120000 100000 160000 125000 200000 150000 240000 Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components Replace engine air cleaner filter Refer to Engine Air Cleaner Fil ter in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section Change automatic transaxle fluid severe service e Change automatic transaxle fluid if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions n heavy city traffic
310. o allows some features to be personalized Refer to DIC Vehicle Per sonalization in this section for more infor mation DIC Operation and Displays The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the center of the instrument panel DIC Buttons 1657854 The buttons are the trip fuel vehicle infor mation and set reset buttons The button functions are detailed in the following pages Trip Fuel 1 Press this button to scroll through the trip and fuel displays See Trip Fuel Menu Items following for more information on these displays wi Vehicle Information 2 Press this button to scroll through the vehi cle information displays and to personalize the feature settings on your vehicle Refer to Vehicle Information Menu Items follow ing and DIC Vehicle Personalization in this section for more information on these displays V Set Reset 3 Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC Trip Fuel Menu Items Trip Fuel 1 Press this button to scroll through the fol lowing displays ODOMETER Press the trip fuel button until ODOMETER displays This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles mi or kilometers km This display will also show the outside air temperature in either degrees Fahrenheit F or degrees Celsius C To change th
311. o appear on the tell tale line below the gear selections For more information on the manual shift option see Manual Shift Mode in this sec tion PARK P This position locks the front wheels It is the best position to use when the engine is 2 14 FEATURES AND CONTROLS started because the vehicle cannot move easily WARNING It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK P with the parking brake firmly set Your vehicle can roll Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to If you have left the engine running the vehicle can move suddenly You or others could be injured To be sure your vehicle will not move even when you are on fairly level ground always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK P Refer to Shifting Into Park P in this section If you are pulling a trailer refer to Towing a Trailer in Towing in the Driving Your Vehi cle section Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK P before starting the engine The vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock con trol system You must fully apply your reg ular brakes first and then press the shift lever button before you can shift from PARK P when the ignition is in RUN If you cannot shift out of PARK P ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then press t
312. o make sure it is locked 1 Lift and hold the lever located on top of the seatback 2 Tilt the seatback rearward then release the lever when the seatback is in the age to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat desired position 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked Folding and Tumbling the Seat s A WARNING Be sure to return the seat to the pas senger seating position when fin ished Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place 2 Fold the seatback forward Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor If the seatback cannot fold flat try mov ing the front seat forward and or put the front seatback in the upright position A WARNING If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked Do not hit or entrap any part of a third row seat occupant s body when returning the folded or tumbled sec ond row seat to the floor Never use the third row seating posi tion while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled This could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash 2 Lift the seatback and push it rearward Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked To fold and tumble the
313. o remove dust and loose dirt A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats For soils always try to remove them first with plain water or club soda Before cleaning gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques For liquids gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed 5 48 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE For solid dry soils remove as much as possible and then vacuum To clean use the following instructions 1 Saturate a lint free clean white cloth with water or club soda 2 Wring the cloth to remove excess mois ture 3 Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center Continue cleaning using a clean area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled 4 Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the cleaning cloth remains clean 5 If the soil is not completely removed use a mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that was used with plain water If any of the soil remains a commercial fabric cleaner or spot lifter may be neces sary When a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used test a small hidden area for colorfastness first If the locally cleaned area gives any impres sion that a ring formation may result clean the entire surface After the cleaning process has been com
314. oblem regarding the warranty or service of your vehicle please take the following action Consult the Service Manager and the Owner of the Suzuki Automotive Dealer ship Explain your problem and ask for their assistance in resolving your problem The Owner of the dealership is in the very best position to assist you as he or she is vitally concerned with your continued satis faction If you are still in need of additional informa tion or if you are dissatisfied request that your dealer arrange a meeting with your District Service Manager If after doing so you still require further assistance and you purchased your SUZUKI in the continental United States please contact the American Suzuki Cus tomer Relations Department by telephone at 1 800 934 0934 or in writing at American Suzuki Motor Corporation Automotive Customer Relations 3251 East Imperial Highway Brea CA 92821 6795 If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canada please contact the Suzuki Canada Cus tomer Relations Department by telephone at 1 905 889 2677 extension 2254 or in writing at Suzuki Canada Inc Customer Relations 100 East Beaver Creek Road Richmond Hill On L4B 1J6 In the event you require assistance related to your SUZUKI while temporarily travel ling in either the United States or Canada you may wish to contact the Suzuki Cus tomer Relations Department directly of the country in which you are temporarily oper ating your vehicle Plea
315. of the seats Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle When you carry something inside the vehicle secure it whenever you can Do not leave a seat folded down unless you need to Towing Towing Your Vehicle Consult your dealer or a professional tow ing service if you need to have your dis abled vehicle towed If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes such as behind a motorhome refer to Recreational Vehicle Towing following Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome The two most common types of recreational vehicle tow ing are known as dinghy towing towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground and dolly towing towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly With the proper preparation and equip ment many vehicles can be towed in these ways See Dinghy Towing and Dolly Tow ing following Here are some important things to con sider before you do recreational vehicle towing What s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle Be sure you read the tow vehi cle manufacturer s recommendations How far will you tow Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow Do you have the proper towing equip ment See your dealer or trailering pro fession
316. of favorites pages perform the fol lowing steps 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1 6 label 3 Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page num bers 4 Press the FAV button or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the pro cess of programming your favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages 3 51 Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble BASS MID TREB Bass Midrange or Treble To adjust bass midrange or treble press the tune knob until the tone control labels display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclock wise to adjust the highlighted setting If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble To quickly adjust bass midrange or treble to the middle position press the pushbut ton positioned under the BASS MID or TREB label for more than two seconds A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position To quickly adjust all tone and speaker con trols to the middle position press the tune knob for more than two seconds until a beep sounds EQ Equalization Press this button to choose bass and tre ble equalization settings designe
317. ome on at all for 10 months Refer to Engine Oil in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section Reset oil life system An Emission Control Service If the system is ever reset accidentally perform the maintenance service within 5000 km since your last service Refer to Engine Oil Life System in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Ser vice and Appearance Care section Visually check for any leaks or damage A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired and the fluid level checked Add fluid if needed Rotate tires and check infla tion pressures and wear Rotate tires every 8000 to 13000 km Refer to Tire Inspection and Rotation in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section and At Least Once a Month in this section Inspect brake system Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up binding leaks cracks chafing etc Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition Inspect drum brake linings shoes for wear or cracks if equipped Inspect other brake parts including drums wheel cylinders calipers parking brake etc Check parking brake adjustment Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed Perform any needed addi tional services Refer to Additional Required Services For CANADA in this
318. on 2 Press the FAV button to display the page where you want the station stored 3 Press and hold one of the six pushbut tons until a beep sounds Whenever that pushbutton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 4 Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station you want stored as a favor ite The number of favorites pages can be setup using the MENU button To setup the number of favorites pages perform the fol lowing steps 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1 6 label 3 Select the desired number of favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below the displayed page num bers 4 Press the FAV button or let the menu time out to return to the original main radio screen showing the radio station frequency labels and to begin the pro cess of programming your favorites for the chosen amount of numbered pages Setting the Tone Bass Midrange Treble BASS MID TREB Bass Midrange or Treble To adjust bass midrange or treble press the tune knob until the tone control labels appear on the display Continue pressing to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting You can also adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK FWD forward or REV reverse button until t
319. on controls might not work as well your vehicle s fuel economy might not be as good and the engine might not run as smoothly This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by your warranty CAUTION Modifications made to the engine transaxle exhaust intake or fuel system of your vehicle or the replace ment of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Perfor mance Criteria TPC can affect your vehicle s emission controls and may cause this light to come on Modifica tions to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection Maintenance test Refer to Accessories and Modifications in Service in the Service and Appearance Care section This light should come on as a check to show you it is working when the ignition is on and the engine is not running If the light does not come on have it repaired This light will also come on during a mal function in one of two ways Light Flashing A misfire condition has been detected A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control sys tem on your vehicle Diagnosis and ser vice may be required Light On Steady An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle Diag nosis and service may be required If the Light is Flashing The following may prevent more serious damage to
320. on the fan control the system automatically adjusts the fan speed Temperature Setting The system uses the outside temperature passenger compartment air temperature and solar load sensors to maintain the chosen temperature setting AUTO Automatic Mode 1 Turn the fan and mode control to the AUTO position 2 Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting between 31 F 16 C and 89 F 31 C Choosing the coldest or warm est temperature setting does not cause 3 11 the system to heat or cool any faster In cold weather the system starts at lower fan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into the vehicle until warmer air is available The system begins blowing air at the floor but can change modes automati cally as the vehicle warms up to main tain the chosen temperature setting The length of time needed to warm the interior depends on the outside temper ature and temperature of the vehicle 3 Wait 20 to 30 minutes for the system to stabilize in order for the system to regu late automatically Then adjust the tem perature as necessary to find your comfort setting Do not cover the solar sensor located in the center of the instrument panel near the windshield For more information on the solar sen sor refer to Sensors later in this sec tion AUTO RECIRCULATION Using the previous temperature setting the system automatically controls the air inlet to supply fresh outside air or recircu late
321. on the seat cushion sure it is locked CAUTION Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause dam age to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Safety Belts Safety Belts They Are for Everyone This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts A WARNING Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot wear a safety belt prop erly If you are in a crash and you are not wearing a safety belt your inju ries can be much worse You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it You can be seriously injured or killed In the same crash you might not be if you are buckled up Always fasten your safety belt and check that your passengers belts are fastened properly too A WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure every one in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly 1 9 Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your passengers to buckle your safety belts Refer to Safety Belt Reminder Ligh
322. on to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays RDM Random With the random setting MP3 files on the CD R can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To play MP3 files from the CD R you are listening to in ran dom order press the pushbutton posi tioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play Music Navigator Use the music navigator feature to play MP3 files on the CD R in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album 103 tag information It might take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD R To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label or eject the disc The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is finished the CD R begins playing again Once the disc has been scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows If you want to listen to files by another artist press the push button located below either arrow button The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order Continue pressing either button until
323. onal keys only If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key9 I to have keys made and programmed to the system See your dealer o ob a locksmith who can service PASS Key 111 to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system To program the new additional key do the following 1 Verify that the new key has a D stamped on it 2 Insert the original already pro grammed key in the ignition and start the engine If the engine will not start see your dealer for service 3 After the engine has started turn the key to LOCK and remove the key 4 Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to the RUN position within five seconds of removing the original key 5 The security light will turn off once the key has been programmed 6 Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to be programmed 2 10 FEATURES AND CONTROLS If you are driving and the security light comes on and stays on you may be able to restart your engine Your PASS Key 11 system however may not be working properly and must be serviced by your dealer If you lose or damage your PASS Key 11 key see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key 111 to have a new key made 2 11 Daily Inspection Checklist Before Driving 1 Make sure that windows mirrors lights and reflectors are clean and unob stru
324. or eliminator used on fab rics vinyl leather and carpet grime from chrome Cleaner wheels and wire wheel covers Removes dust finger Finish prints and surface Enhancer contaminants Spray on and wipe off Swirl Remover Polish Removes swirl marks fine scratches and other light surface con tamination SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number VIN SAMPLE4UX1M072675 1410338 This is the legal identifier for your vehicle It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel on the driver side You can see it if you look through the wind shield from outside your vehicle The VIN also appears on the Certification Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration Engine Identification The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code This code helps you identify your vehicle s engine specifications and replacement parts 5 52 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Service Parts Identification Label This label is on the inside of the glove box It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts The label has the following informa tion Vehicle Identification Number VIN Model designation Paint information Production options and special equip ment Do not remove this label from the vehicle 5 53 Electrical System Add On Electrical Equipment CAUTION Do
325. or Locks The power door lock switches are located on the drivers and front passengers doors g Unlock To unlock the doors press the unlock sym bol Lock Remove the ignition key and press the lock symbol to lock all of the doors Delayed Locking A chime will sound three times to indicate a door or liftgate is open when you try to lock the doors with the remote keyless entry RKE transmitter or the power door lock switch The doors will not lock and the theft deterrent system will not arm until all the doors are closed and ten seconds have passed The delayed locking feature can be pro grammed through the Driver Information Center DIC Refer to DIC Vehicle Per sonalization in Driver Information Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section Programmable Automatic Door Locks Your vehicle has an automatic lock unlock feature which enables you to program the power door locks through the Driver Infor mation Center DIC Refer to DIC Vehicle Personalization in Driver Information Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section for more information on DIC pro gramming Rear Door Security Locks Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside 831642 The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door You must open the rear doors to access them To set the security locks do
326. ory labels on the radio display Continue pressing the CAT button until the desired category name is displayed Another way to navi gate the category list is to press the REV button or the FWD button 2 Press either of the two buttons below the desired category label to immedi ately tune to the first XM station associated with that category 3 Turn the tune knob press the buttons below the right or left arrows displayed or press the right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next or previous XMTM sta tion within the selected category 4 To exit the category search mode press the FAV button or BAND button to display your favorites again Undesired XMTM categories can be removed through the setup menu To remove an undesired category perform the following 1 Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu 2 Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label 3 Turn the tune knob to display the cate gory you want removed 4 Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displays 5 Repeat the steps to remove more cate gories Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category displays or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph 8 km h Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio sys
327. osition in the rear seat Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt 1 Remove the guide from its storage clip on the back of the seatback 1 16 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1379299 2 Slide the guide under and past the belt The elastic cord must be under the belt Then place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide 1 17 1397291 3 Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top A WARNING A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wear ing the belt could be seriously injured The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces 1400065 4 Buckle position and release the safety belt as described in Rear Seat Passen gers in this section Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder To remove and store the comfort guide squeeze the belt edges together so that you can take them out of the guide Slide the guide back onto its storage clip located on the seatback Safety Belt Pretensioners Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver and right front passenger Although you cannot see them they are part of the safety belt assembly They help tighten the safety belts du
328. ot be covered by your warranty Use only SUZUKI approved cleaners on alumi num or chrome plated wheels Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water Rinse with 5 50 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE clean water After rinsing thoroughly dry with a soft clean towel A wax may then be applied CAUTION Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels could damage the wheels The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of the vehicle Do not use strong soaps chemicals abrasive pol ishes abrasive cleaners cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because the surface could be damaged Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels CAUTION If you drive your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes you could damage the aluminum chrome plated wheels The repairs would not be covered by your war ranty Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum chrome plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes 5 51 Do not take the vehicle through an auto matic car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels Tires To clean the tires use a stiff brush with tire cleaner CAUTION Using petroleum based
329. our left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your vehicle s inside mir ror activate the right lane change signal and move back into the right lane Remember that your vehicle s passen ger side outside mirror is convex The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads Reconsider before passing the next vehicle Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly Even though the brake lamps are not flashing it may be slowing down or starting to turn f you are being passed make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you Perhaps you can ease a little to the right Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three con trol systems brakes steering and accel eration do not have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked In any emergency do not give up Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger Skidding In a skid a driver can lose control of the vehicle Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to exist ing conditions and by not overdriving those conditions But skids are always pos sible The three types of skids correspond to yo
330. ow to Check Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Check the tire s inflation pressure when the tires are cold Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile 1 6 km Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label no further adjustment is necessary If the inflation pressure is low add air until you reach the recommended amount 5 30 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE If you overfill the tire release air by push ing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve Re check the tire pressure with the tire gage Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture Tire Pressure Monitor System Your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS This system uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pres sure levels TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly except for the spare tire The TPMS sensors mon itor the air pressure in your vehicle s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle Low Tire Pressur
331. p or the down arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio station stored as a favorite When a CD DVD is playing press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or pre vious track or chapter Mute Voice Recognition Press and release this button to silence the vehicle speakers only The audio of the wireless and wired headphones if your vehicle has these features will not be muted Press and release this button again to turn the sound on If your vehicle has the navigation system press and hold this button for longer than one second to initiate voice recognition See Voice Recognition in the Navigation System manual for more information SRCE Source Press this button to switch between the radio AM FM XM if equipped CD and if your vehicle has these features DVD front auxiliary and rear auxiliary Volume Press the plus or minus button to increase or to decrease the radio volume Seek Press the seek arrow to go to the next radio station while in AM FM or XM if equipped Press this button to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD DVD slot Radio Reception XM Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast to coast in the 48 contiguous United States and in Can ada You may experience interference with sat ellite radio signals while driving near tall buildings or through hilly areas causing t
332. place any of your wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts replace them only with new original equipment parts This way you will be sure to have the right wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle A WARNING Using the wrong replacement wheels wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle make your tires lose air and make you lose control You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured Always use the correct wheel wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement 5 37 CAUTION The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life brake cooling speedometer or odometer calibration headlamp aim bumper height vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis Refer to Changing a Flat Tire in this sec tion for more information Used Replacement Wheels WARNING Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous You cannot know how it has been used or how far it has been driven It could fail suddenly and cause a crash If you have to replace a wheel use a new original equipment wheel Tire Chains A WARNING Do not use tire chains There is not enough clearance Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause dam age to the brakes suspension or other vehicle parts The area dam aged by the tire chains could cause you
333. played Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track If either SEEK 3 42 INSTRUMENT PANEL arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or for ward through the CD 4 REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse play back quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track appears on the display gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this pushbutton to advance playback quickly within a track You will hear sound at a reduced volume Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track appears on the display RDM Random With random you can listen to CD tracks in random rather than sequential order To use random do the following 1 Press this button to play tracks from the CD you are listening to in random order The random icon appears on the dis play 2 Press this button again to turn off ran dom play The random icon disappears from the display RPT Repeat With repeat one track can be repeated played over and over To use repeat press and release the RPT button An arrow symbol appears on the display 3 43 Press RPT again to turn off repeat play When repeat is off the arrow symbol is no longer displayed 1 Information Press this button to switch the display between the track number elapsed time of the t
334. plays see CD Messages later in this section 3 53 A CD Eject Press and release the CD eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing in the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD can be removed If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject amp DVD Eject Press and release the DVD eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing in the bottom slot A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays Once the disc is ejected Remove Disc displays The CD can be removed If the CD is not removed after several seconds the CD automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 44 Tune Turn this knob to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing K SEEK Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than five sec onds on the CD have played If less than five seconds on the CD have played the previous track plays Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the nex
335. posal Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash pouring it on the ground into sewers or into streams or bodies of water Instead recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil If you have a prob lem properly disposing of your used oil ask your dealer a service station or a local recycling center for help Engine Air Cleaner Filter The engine air cleaner filter is located in the engine compartment on the passen ger s side of the vehicle Refer to Engine Compartment Overview in this section for more information on location When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspect the air cleaner filter at the Mainte nance ll intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50000 mile 83000 km interval Refer to Scheduled Mainte nance in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section for more information If you are driving in dusty dirty conditions inspect the filter at each engine oil change How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner Filter To inspect the air cleaner filter remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt If the fil ter remains caked with dirt a new filter is required To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner filter do the following 1 Turn off the engine 1733570 2 Disconnect the air flow sensor electrical connector 3 Loosen the screws on the clamps hold ing the air outlet du
336. pressed again within five seconds all remaining doors and the liftgate will unlock The interior lamps will come on and stay on for 20 sec onds or until the ignition is turned on If enabled through the DIC the parking lamps will flash once to indicate unlocking has occurred Refer to DIC Vehicle Per sonalization in Driver Information Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section Pressing the unlock button on the RKE 2 2 FEATURES AND CONTROLS transmitter will disarm the content theft deterrent system Refer to Content Theft Deterrent in this section 2 Vehicle Locator Panic Alarm Press and release this button to locate your vehicle The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound three times Press and hold this button for more than two seconds to activate the panic alarm The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound repeatedly for 30 seconds The alarm will turn off when the ignition is moved to RUN or the alarm button is pressed again The ignition must be in LOCK for the panic alarm to work The RKE transmitter is used to arm disarm the content theft deterrent system Your vehicle s theft deterrent system can be programmed to three different modes Refer to Content Theft Deterrent in this section If you accidentally set off the alarm when entering or exiting the vehicle you can shut it off by pressing the lock or unlock button once or the panic alarm button twice Match
337. r than the luggage carrier like panel ing plywood a mattress and so forth the wind can catch it as you drive along This can cause you to lose control What you are carrying could be violently torn off and this could cause you or other drivers to have a collision and of course damage your vehicle You may be able to carry something like this inside But never carry something longer or wider than the luggage carrier on top of your vehicle A luggage carrier allows you to load things on top of your vehicle The luggage carrier has side rails attached to the roof sliding crossrails if equipped and places to use for tying things down These let you load some things on top of your vehicle as long as they are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier The roof rack crossrails lock in five posi tions along the straight section of the side rail FEATURES AND CONTROLS 1768137 Press the levers down until the locking mechanisms fully engage to the side rail Make sure each lever is in the down posi tion The crossrail will not slide when prop erly engaged 2 22 FEATURES AND CONTROLS 1767348 To reposition the crossrail pull up on the end levers on each side of the crossrail to the upright position This will release the locking mechanism from the siderail Lift and place the crossrail into the new posi tion Press the levers down until the lock ing mechanisms fully engag
338. ra ture Let the warning lights and gages work as they should CAUTION Using coolant other than DEX COOL may cause premature engine heater core or radiator corrosion In addi tion the engine coolant may require changing sooner at the first mainte nance service after each 30000 miles 50000 km or 24 months whichever occurs first Any repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always use DEX COOL silicate free cool ant in your vehicle What to Use Use a mixture of one half clean drinkable water and one half DEX COOL coolant which will not damage aluminum parts If you use this coolant mixture you do not need to add anything else A WARNING Adding only plain water to your cool ing system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned Use a 50 50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX COOL coolant CAUTION If you use an improper coolant mix ture your engine could overheat and be badly damaged The repair cost would not be covered by your war ranty Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine radi ator heater core and other parts SERVI
339. rack and the time When the ignition is off press this button to display the time BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD is playing The CD remains safely inside the radio for future listening CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when listen ing to the radio The CD icon and track number appears on the display when a CD is in the player Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such as a portable audio player CD Messages CHECK DISC If this message appears on the display and or the CD comes out it could be for one of the following reasons t is very hot When the temperature returns to normal the CD should play You are driving on a very rough road When the road becomes smoother the CD should play The CD is dirty scratched wet or upside down The air is very humid If so wait about an hour and try again There may have been a problem while burning the CD R The label may be caught in the CD player If the CD is not playing correctly for any other reason try a known good CD If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer If the radio displays an error message write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem Using the Auxiliary Input Jack Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on the lower right side of the faceplate
340. radio setup menu 3 Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM volume label on the radio dis play 4 Press the pushbutton under the desired SCV setting OFF Low Med medium or High to select the level of radio vol ume compensation The display times out after approximately 10 seconds Each higher setting allows for more radio volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds Finding a Station BAND Press this button to switch between AM FM or XM M if equipped The display shows the selection 44 Tune Turn this knob to select radio stations Ki SEEK Press the left or right SEEK arrow to go to the next or to the previous station and stay there To scan stations press and hold either SEEK arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds The radio goes to a station plays for a few seconds then goes to the next station Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanning The radio seeks and scans stations only with a strong signal that are in the selected band 1 Information XMTM Satellite Radio Service MP3 and RDS Features Press the information button to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or MP3 song A choice of additional information such as Channel Song Artist and CAT category could appear Continue press ing the information button to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels and the informat
341. railer with your vehicle carbon monoxide CO could come into your vehicle You cannot see or smell CO It can cause unconsciousness or death Refer to Engine Exhaust in Starting and Operating Your Vehi cle in the Features and Controls section To maximize your safety when towing a trailer e Have your exhaust system inspected for leaks and make nec essary repairs before starting on your trip Keep the liftgate closed If exhaust does come into your vehicle through a window in the rear or another opening drive with your front main heating or cooling system on and with the fan on any speed This will bring fresh out side air into your vehicle Do not use the climate control setting for maximum air because it only recir culates the air inside your vehicle Refer to Automatic Climate Con trol System in Climate Controls in the Instrument Panel section Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience Before setting out for the open road you will want to get to know your rig Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself Before you start check all trailer hitch parts and attachments safety chains elec trical connector lamps tires and mirror adjustment If the trailer has electric br
342. rake fluid level Refer to Brakes in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care section for more information If the light comes on while you are driving pull off the road and stop carefully You may notice that the pedal is harder to push or the pedal may go closer to the floor It may take longer to stop If the light is still on have the vehicle towed for service Refer to Towing Your Vehicle in Towing in the Driving Your Vehicle section A WARNING Your brake system may not be work ing properly if the brake system warning light is on Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident If the light is still on after you have pulled off the road and stopped carefully have the vehi cle towed for service Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light 807057 With the Anti Lock Brake System ABS the light will come on when your engine is started and stay on for several seconds This is normal If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on there may be a problem with the anti lock portion of the brake system If the brake system warning light is not on you still have brakes but you do not have anti lock brakes Refer to Brake System Warn ing Light in this section for more informa tion If the light stays on turn the ignition to LOCK If the light comes on when you are driving stop as soon as possible and turn the ig
343. rd droppings chemi cals from industrial chimneys etc can damage the vehicle s finish if they remain on painted surfaces Wash the vehicle as Soon as possible If necessary use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years To help keep the paint finish looking new keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Windshield and Wiper Blades If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if the wiper blade chatters when running wax sap or other material may be on the blade or wind shield Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning liquid or powder and water solution The windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent Then rinse the blade with water Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary replace blades that look worn Aluminum Wheels CAUTION If you use strong soaps chemicals abrasive polishes cleaners brushes or cleaners that contain acid on alu minum or chrome plated wheels you could damage the surface of the wheel s The repairs would n
344. re are some tips Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated with a comfortably cool interior Keep your eyes moving Scan the road ahead and to the sides Check your vehicle s mirrors and instruments fre quently If you get sleepy pull off the road into a rest service or parking area and take a nap get some exercise or both For safety treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency 4 13 Hill and Mountain Roads 806088 Driving on steep hills or mountains is differ ent from driving in flat or rolling terrain If you drive regularly in steep country or if you are planning to visit there here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable Keep your vehicle in good shape Check all fluid levels and also the brakes tires cooling system and transaxle These parts can work hard on mountain roads WARNING If you do not shift down the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill You could crash Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope A WARNING Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL N or with the ignition off is dangerous The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down They could get so hot that they would not work well You would then have poor brak ing or even none going down a hill You could crash Always have the engine running and your vehicle in gear wh
345. re people in a sudden stop or turn or in a crash Remove or secure all items before driving To fold the seatback do the following 1 Lower the head restraint all the way 2 Lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it Slide the seat as far back as it will go and release the bar Try to move the seat back and forth to make sure it is locked into place 1 5 To raise the seatback do the following 1 Lift the recliner lever located on the outboard side of the seat up fully and push up on the seatback 2 Continue raising the seatback until the seatback re engages WARNING If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place The recliner lever is also used to recline the seatback while a passenger is seated Refer to Manual Reclining Seatbacks in this section Rear Seats Split Folding the Second Row Seat The second row split bench seatbacks have four available positions folded for ward upright partially reclined or fully reclined Both of the seatbacks can be moved to any of the four positions indepen dent of the other seatback position WARNING If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the per
346. re with a group designate a driver who will not drink Control of a Vehicle You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go They are the brakes the steering and the accel erator All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road Sometimes as when you are driving on snow or ice it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road 4 3 can provide That means you can lose con trol of your vehicle Adding non Suzuki accessories can affect your vehicle s performance Refer to Accessories and Modifications in Ser vice in the Service and Appearance Care section Braking Refer to Brake System Warning Light in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section Braking action involves perception time and reaction time First you have to decide to push on the brake pedal That is perception time Then you have to bring up your foot and do it That is reaction time Average reaction time is about three fourths of a second But that is only an average It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another Age physical condition alertness coordination and eyesight all play a part So do alcohol drugs and frus tration But even in three fourths of a sec ond a vehicle moving at 60 mph 100 km h travels 66 feet 20 m That could be a lot of distance in an emergen
347. ring the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal near frontal rear or side crash or a roll over if the threshold conditions for preten sioner activation are met Pretensioners work only once If they acti vate in a crash you will need to get new ones and probably other new parts for your safety belt system Refer to Replac ing Restraint System Parts After a Crash in this section Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle s safety belt will fasten around you you should use it But if a safety belt is not long enough your dealer will order you an extender When you go in to order it take the heaviest coat you will wear so the extender will be long enough for you To help avoid personal injury do not let someone else use it and use it only for the seat it is made to fit The extender has been designed for adults Never use it for securing child seats To wear it just attach it to the regular safety belt For more information see the instruc tion sheet that comes with the extender Child Restraints Older Children 1379300 Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle s safety belts Question What is the proper way to wear safety belts Answer An older child should wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips just touching the
348. rmation about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system A WARNING For up to 10 seconds after the igni tion is turned off and the battery is disconnected an airbag can still inflate during improper service You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates Avoid yellow connectors They are probably part of the airbag system Be sure to follow proper service procedures and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so The airbag system does not need regular maintenance Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Question Is there anything might add to the front or sides of the vehicle that could keep the airbags from working properly Answer Yes If you add things that change your vehicle s frame bumper system height front end or side sheet metal they may keep the airbag system from working prop erly Also the airbag system may not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag sensors If you have any questions about this you should contact Customer Assis tance before you modify your vehicle Question Because have a disability have to get my vehicle modified How can find out whether this will affect my airbag sys tem Answer Changing or moving any parts of the front seats safety belts the airbag sensing and diagnostic module rollover sensor module steering wheel instrument panel over head console ceiling headliner ceiling
349. rom this device through the vehicle speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio Video Screen The video screen is located in the RSE overhead console To use the video screen do the following 1 Push the release button located on the RSE overhead console 2 Rotate the screen to the desired posi tion When the video screen is not in use push it up into its locked position If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position the screen will remain on this is normal and the DVD will continue to play through the previous audio Source Use the remote control power but ton or eject the disc to turn off the screen The RSE overhead console contains the infrared receivers for the wireless head phones and the infrared receivers for the remote control They are located at the rear of the console CAUTION Avoid directly touching the video screen as damage may occur See Cleaning the Video Screen later in this section for more information Remote Control To use the remote control aim it at the transmitter window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and press the desired button Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability of the RSE transmit ter to receive signals from the remote con trol If the remote control does not seem to be working the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section Objects blocking the line of sight m
350. rom any underhood electric fan If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling do not do anything else until it cools down The vehicle should be parked on a level surface If there seems to be no leak with the engine on check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running If the engine is overheating the fans should be running If the fans are not running the vehicle needs service CAUTION Engine damage from running your engine without coolant is not covered by your warranty Refer to Over heated Engine Protection Operating Mode in this section for information on driving to a safe place in an emer gency SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Recovery Tank A WARNING Adding only plain water to your cool ing system can be dangerous Plain water or some other liquid such as alcohol can boil before the proper coolant mixture will Your vehicle s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture With plain water or the wrong mixture your engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning Your engine could catch fire and you When the engine is cold the coolant level should be at or above the cold fill line on the coolant recovery tank If it is not there CAUTION may be a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses heater hoses radiator water pump or somewhere else in the or others could be burned Use a 50 50
351. s clear all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode Floor Defog This mode directs about half of the air to the floor outlets and the remaining air to the windshield and the side window out lets W Defrost This mode directs most of the air to the windshield and the side window outlets Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is in RUN 3 12 INSTRUMENT PANEL Gy Rear Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off An indicator light on the button comes on to let you know that the rear window defogger is activated The rear window defogger only works when the ignition is in RUN The rear win dow defogger stays on for approximately 15 minutes after the button is pressed unless the ignition is turned to ACC or LOCK If turned on again the defogger only runs for about five minutes before turning off The defogger can also be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning off the engine CAUTION Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window If you do you could cut or damage the warm ing grid and the repairs would not be covered by your warranty Do not attach a temporary vehicle license tape a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid 3 13 Outlet Adjustment U
352. s been in a severe frontal or side impact The sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator which inflates the airbag The inflator airbag and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the right front passenger For vehicles with roof mounted rollover airbags the airbag mod ules are located in the ceiling of the vehi cle near the side windows If your vehicle has a third row seat with roof mounted rollover airbags the airbag modules are located inside the rear most pillar trim and above in the ceiling above the fixed rear glass How Does an Airbag Restrain In moderate to severe frontal or near fron tal collisions even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instru ment panel In moderate to severe side collisions even belted occupants can con tact the inside of the vehicle Airbags sup plement the protection provided by safety belts Airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant s upper body stopping the occupant more gradually But the frontal airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including rollovers rear impacts and many side impacts primarily because an occu pants motion is not toward the airbag Roof mounted rollover airbags would not help you in many types of collisions including many frontal or near frontal colli sions and rear impacts Airbags should nev
353. s called wear bars that show across the tread of a tire when only 1 16 inch 1 6 mm of tread remains Refer to When It Is Time for New Tires in this section UTQGS Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire s traction temperature and treadwear Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures The rat ings are molded into the sidewall of the tire Refer to Uniform Tire Quality Grad ing in this section Vehicle Capacity Weight The number of designated seating posi tions multiplied by 150 Ibs 68 kg plus the rated cargo load Refer to Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire Load on an individual tire due to curb weight accessory weight occupant weight and cargo weight Vehicle Placard A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle s capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recom mended inflation pressure Refer to Tire and Loading Information Label under Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section Inflation Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pres sure to operate effectively CAUTION Do not let anyone tell you that under inflation or over inflation is all right It
354. s performance Refer to Accessories and Modifications in Ser vice in the Service and Appearance Care section Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking For example you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you You can avoid these prob lems by braking if you can stop in time But sometimes you cannot there is not room That is the time for evasive action steering around the problem Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these First apply your brakes Refer to Braking in this section It is bet ter to remove as much speed as you can 4 7 from a possible collision Then steer around the problem to the left or right depending on the space available 811539 An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision If you are holding the steering wheel at the recom mended 9 and 3 o clock positions you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly with out removing either hand But you have to act fast steer quickly and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly Off Road Recovery You
355. s that the passen ger sensing system has not turned off the passenger s frontal airbag A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger s airbag inflates This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag Do not use a rear facing child restraint in the right front passen ger s seat if the airbag is turned on If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger s frontal air bag Refer to Passenger Sensing System in Airbag System in the Seats and Restraint Systems section for more on this including important safety information If after several seconds all status indicator lights remain on or if there are no lights at all there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system See your dealer for service INSTRUMENT PANEL A WARNING If the off indicator and the airbag readiness light ever come together it means that something may be wrong with the airbag sys tem If this ever happens have the vehicle serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger seat may not have the protection of the frontal air bag Refer to Airbag Readiness Light in this section 3 18 INSTRUMENT PANEL Battery Warning Light
356. savesscarscsecvesaserirdcsetecenduansaas ro aaron rid nimi uan Rar 5 23 Theft Deterrent Feature e 3 73 Theft Deterrent Systems eene 2 9 adl M 3 3 Tire Chains dm 5 37 Tire Inspection and Rotation 5 33 Tire Pressure Light esee 3 21 Tire Pressure Monitor System sss 5 31 Tire Sidewall Labeling Tir S120 Tire Terminology and Definitions 5 28 EE 5 26 5 51 Top Tether Anchor eese enne nnns 1 27 TOWING 4 20 Towing Your Vehicle eere 4 20 Traction Control System TCS 4 5 Traction Control System TCS Warning Light 3 20 Transfer Case Power Transfer Unit 5 22 Trip Odomeler cnni 3 15 Turn Signal Multifunction Lever eese 3 3 U Underbody Maintenance eere 5 51 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ees 5 35 Using the Maintenance Schedule 6 1 V Vehicle Care Appearance Materials 5 52 INDEX Vehicle Identification
357. screw the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag 4 Replace the cap and completely tighten it 5 Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick The fluid level should be between the Min Minimum and Max Maximum marks when the engine is cold and at the Max mark when the engine is hot If the fluid is at the Min mark when the engine is cold or hot power steering fluid should be added What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use refer to Recommended Fluids and Lubri cants in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section Always use the proper fluid Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When you need windshield washer fluid be sure to read the manufacturer s instruc tions before use If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the tempera ture may fall below freezing use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freez ing Adding Washer Fluid oN NN m 809177 Open the cap with the washer symbol on it Add washer fluid until the tank is full Refer to Engine Compartment Overview in this section for reservoir location 5 16 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE CAUTION When using concentrated washer fluid follow the manufacturer s instructions for adding water Do not mix water with ready to use washer flu
358. se a child restraint A WARNING People should never hold a baby in their arms while riding in a vehicle A baby does not weigh much until a crash During a crash a baby will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it For example in a crash at only 25 mph 40 km h a 12 Ib 5 5 kg baby will suddenly become a 240 Ib 110 kg force on a person s arms A baby should be secured in an appro priate restraint SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1379304 WARNING Children who up against or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older chil dren but not for young children and infants Neither the vehicle s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide 1379315 Question What are the different types of add on child restraints Answer Add on child restraints which are pur chased by the vehicle s owner are avail able in four basic types Selection of a particular restraint should take into consid eration not only the child s weight height and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used For most basic types of child restraints there are many different models available When purchasing a child restraint
359. se be certain to provide us with the fol lowing information the model Vehicle Identification Number mileage accesso ries involved event dates your concern and any other comments which you may have When we receive your correspon dence we will be pleased to contact the Owner of your dealership and assist in resolving your concern For owners outside the continental United States please refer to the distributor s address listed in your Warranty Information booklet SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION 0 1 IMPORTANT AWARNING CAUTION NOTE Please read this manual and follow its instructions carefully To emphasize spe cial information the symbol A and the words WARNING CAUTION and NOTE have special meanings Pay special atten tion to the messages highlighted by these signal words A WARNING Indicates a potential hazard that could result in death or injury 75F135 The circle with a slash in this manual means Don t do this or Don t let this hap pen CAUTION Indicates a potential hazard that could result in vehicle damage NOTE Indicates special information to make maintenance easier or instructions clearer 0 2 MODIFICATION WARNING A WARNING Do not modify this vehicle Modifica tion could adversely affect safety handling performance or durability and may violate governmental regu lations In addition damage or perfor mance problems resulting from modification may not be covere
360. se the louvers located on the air outlets to change the direction of the airflow Operation Tips Clear away any ice snow or leaves from the air inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block the flow of air into your vehicle Do not use any non SUZUKI approved hood deflectors that could adversely affect the performance of the system Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more effectively Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System If your vehicle has this system the rear controls are three knobs located on the rear of the center floor console The sys tem can be controlled from the front con trols as well as the rear controls To turn the system on press the AUX but ton on the front climate control system an indicator light will be lit Pressing the AUX button the first time will turn the rear sys tem on in a mimic mode In this mode the airflow in the rear will be similar to the air flow direction temperature and fan speed of the front controls The rear system can be turned off by pressing the AUX button again or by turning the rear fan control knob counterclockwise all the way If the rear controls are adjusted after the AUX button is pressed the system will enter a rear independent mode Airflow in the rear is then directed according to the settings of the rear controls 1732690 Fan Knob Turn the left knob clock
361. se to adjust the setting You can also adjust the setting by pressing either the SEEK FWD or REV buttons Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error appears on the display it means that the radio has not been configured properly for your vehicle and it must be returned to your dealer for service Loc Locked This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer Playing a CD Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When a CD is inserted the CD symbol appears on the radio display As each new track starts to play the track number appears on the display The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CDs with an adapter ring Full size CDs and the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase
362. seat do the follow ing 1 Make sure that there is nothing under in front of or on the seat 1831564 3 Use the pullstrap to release the rear of the seat from the floor As you use the pullstrap pull forward on the seat to lift it into its tumbled position 1 7 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Third Row Seat Unfolding the Seatback s To return the seatback to the upright posi A WARNING tion do the following Be sure to return the seat to the pas 1 Open the liftgate to access the pullstrap senger seating position when fin for the seat ished Push and pull on the seat to cR HS 2 Use the pullstrap on the seatback to make sure it is locked into place pull the seatback up until it locks into Never use the third row seating posi the upright position tion while the second row is folded or folded and tumbled This could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash A WARNING If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the If the vehicle has a third row seat the seat 1811892 person sitting there AWENE push back s can be folded 2 Lift the lever located on the top of the and pull on the seatback to be sure it seatback on the outboard side of the is locked seat and fold the seatback forward Folding the Seatback s To fold the seatback do the following 3 Push and pull on the seatback to make 1 Remove all items
363. seat armrest that contains two cupholders To access the cupholders pull the armrest down from the rear seatback Convenience Net Your vehicle may have a rear compartment net to prevent items from rolling under the rear seat There may also be four conve nience net tie downs Two tie downs are located on the side trim just behind the rear seat and the other two are located on the floor at the rear of the cargo area Sunroof If your vehicle has this feature the sunroof switch is located on the headliner above the rearview mirror The ignition must be in RUN or ACC or Retained Accessory Power RAP must be active to operate the sunroof Refer to Retained Accessory Power RAP in this section for more infor mation 1753772 To express open the sunroof glass panel and sunshade press the switch rearward and release it To stop the sunroof before it is completely open press the switch rearward again The sunshade cannot be closed with the sunroof open To close the sunroof press forward and hold the switch until the sunroof stops lifts and seals at the back of the sunroof glass Press forward on the switch again to make sure the sunroof is fully closed To put the sunroof in the vent position pull down on the front of the switch Push up on the front of the switch to close it FEATURES AND CONTROLS 2 24 FEATURES AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL Instrument Panel Overv
364. service help right away Overheated Engine Protection Operat ing Mode This emergency operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation If an overheated engine condition exists an overheat pro tection mode which alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage In this mode you will notice a significant loss in power and engine performance The engine coolant temperature warning light on the instrument panel will come on to indicate the vehicle has entered over heated engine protection operating mode The temperature gage will also indicate an overheat condition exists Driving extended miles km and or towing a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be avoided CAUTION After driving in the overheated engine protection operating mode to avoid engine damage allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair The engine oil will be severely degraded Repair the cause of cool ant loss change the oil and reset the oil life system Refer to Engine Oil in this section Cooling System When you decide it is safe to lift the hood here is what you will see 1733770 A Electric Engine Cooling Fans B Coolant Recovery Tank C Pressure Cap A WARNING An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away f
365. sly listed lamps and lights Headlamps on Reminder If you open the driver s door with the igni tion off and the lamps on you will hear a warning chime Daytime Running Lamps DRL Daytime Running Lamps DRL can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Can ada A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes the DRL work so be sure it is not covered The DRL system s automatic headlamp control will make the low beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when the following conditions are met The ignition is in RUN The exterior lamps control is in AUTO The engine is running When the DRL are on only the low beam headlamps at a reduced level of bright ness will be on The headlamps taillamps sidemarker and other lamps will not be on The instrument panel and cluster will also not be lit When it is dark enough outside the DRL will turn off and the headlamps and parking lamps will turn on The other lamps that come on with the headlamps will also come on When it is bright enough outside the head lamps will go off and the DRL will come on As with any vehicle you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it Autom
366. son sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked WARNING A safety belt that is improperly routed not properly attached or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash The person wear ing the belt could be seriously injured After raising the rear seat back always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached and are not twisted SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS To fold the seatback down do the follow ing CAUTION Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause dam age to the seat or the safety belts Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat 1 Ensure all three of the safety belts are unbuckled and removed from the child comfort guide and the front seatbacks are not reclined 2 Lower the headrest 1406907 3 Lift the lever located on the top of the seatback to release the seatback 4 Fold the seatback forward SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Returning the Seat s to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position do the following 5 Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked CAUTION Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause dam To recline the seatback do the following 1 Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor Push and pull on the seat cushion t
367. ss again Once you are driving about 25 mph 40 km h or more press the RES button on your steering wheel The vehicle will go INSTRUMENT PANEL back to the previous set speed and stay there Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control There are two ways to go to a higher speed Press and hold the RES button on the steering wheel until you reach your new desired speed then release it To increase vehicle speed in small amounts press the RES button Each time you do this you will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h faster Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce your speed while using cruise control Press and hold the SET button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached then release it To slow down in very small amounts push the SET button on the steering wheel briefly Each time you do this the vehicle will go about 1 mph 1 6 km h slower Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed When you take your foot off the pedal your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier How ever if you use the accelerator to increase 3 6 INSTRUMENT PANEL the vehicle s speed for approximately 60 seconds cruise control will disengage Using Cruise Control on Hills How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed load and the steepness of the hills When going up steep hi
368. t and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light in Warning Lights Gages and Indi cators in the Instrument Panel section In most states and in all Canadian prov inces the law says to wear safety belts Here is why They work You never know if you will be in a crash If you do have a crash you do not know if it will be a bad one A few crashes are mild and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person would not survive But most crashes are in between In many of them people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles the facts are clear In most crashes buckling up does matter a lot Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything you go as fast as it goes 806079 Take the simplest vehicle Suppose it is just a seat on wheels 805926 Put someone on it 805928 Get it up to speed Then stop the vehicle The rider does not stop 805931 The person keeps going until stopped by something In a real vehicle it could be the windshield 805935 or the safety belts With safety belts you slow down as the vehicle does You get more time to stop You stop over more distance and your SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS strongest bones take the forces That is why safety belts make such good sense Questions and Answers Abou
369. t Safety Belts Question Will be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if am wearing a safety belt Answer You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not But you can unbuckle a safety belt even if you are upside down And your chance of being conscious dur ing and after an accident so you can unbuckle and get out is much greater if you are belted Question If my vehicle has airbags why should have to wear safety belts Answer Airbags are supplemental systems only so they work with safety belts not instead of them Every airbag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts Even if you are in a vehicle that has air bags you still have to buckle up to get the most protection That is true not only in frontal collisions but especially in side and other collisions 1 10 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Question If am a good driver and never drive far from home why should wear safety belts Answer You may be an excellent driver but if you are in an accident even one that is not your fault you and your passengers can be hurt Being a good driver does not pro tect you from things beyond your control such as bad drivers Most accidents occur within 25 miles 40 km of home And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph 65 km h Safety belts are for everyone How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
370. t to the outside of your vehicle Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an impor tant part of the proper maintenance of your vehicle To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher If the octane rating is less than 87 you may notice an audible knocking noise when you drive commonly referred to as spark knock If this occurs use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking your engine needs service Gasoline Specifications At a minimum gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN CGSB 3 5 in Canada Some _ gasolines contain octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopen tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl MMT We recommend against the use of gaso lines containing MMT Refer to Additives in this section for additional information California Fuel If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California spec ifications See the underhood emission control label If this fuel is not available in states adopting California emissions stan dards your vehicle will operate satisfacto rily on fuels meeting federal specifications but
371. t and right That will clear the area around the front wheels If your vehicle has traction control you should turn the traction control system off Refer to Traction Control System TCS in this section Then shift back and forth between REVERSE R and a for ward gear spinning the wheels as little as possible Release the accelerator pedal while you shift and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear By slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries it may need to be towed out If your vehicle does need to be towed out refer to Towing Your Vehicle in this section DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Loading Your Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry the Tire and Loading Information label and the Vehicle Certifica tion label WARNING Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break and it can change the way your vehicle handles These could cause you to lose control and crash Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle 4 16 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Tire and Loading Information Label Labe
372. t lever on the center con sole To lower a window press the switch down To raise a window pull the switch up The power windows operate when the igni tion is in RUN or ACC A window switch is also located on each rear door Press the bottom of the switch to lower the window Press the top of the switch to raise the window Express Down Window The drivers window switch has an express down feature that is labeled AUTO This allows the drivers window to open fully without having to continuously press the switch Press the switch to the second position and the drivers window 2 8 FEATURES AND CONTROLS will go all the way down To stop the win dow from lowering lift the switch all the way up and release it Window Lockout The driver s window switches also include a lockout switch Press the left side of the switch to prevent rear passengers from using their window switches The driver can still control all the windows with the lockout on Press the right side of the win dow lockout switch to return to normal win dow operation Sun Visors To block out glare swing the sun visor down You can also detach the driver s sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the rod from side to side for greater coverage Visor Vanity Mirrors Your vehicle has covered visor vanity mir rors on both the driver s and passenger s side 2 9 Theft Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business especially in so
373. t the intervals specified to help ensure the safety dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle Your dealer can assist you with these checks and services Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle make sure they are the proper ones as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants in this section Check and Service Instruction Timing Engine oil level check Engine coolant level check Refer to At Each Fuel Fill in this section At each fuel fill Windshield washer fluid level check Tire inflation check Refer to At Least Once a Month in this section At least once a month Tire wear inspection Starter switch check Autimatic transaxle shift lock control system check Ignition transaxle lock check Refer to At Least Once a Year in this section At least once a year Parking brake and automatic transaxle park P mechanism check Underbody flushing service 6 13 At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill Engine Oil Level Check Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary Refer to Engine Oil in Checking Things Under the Hood in the Service and Appearance Care sec tion for further details CAUTION It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level Fa
374. t the plastic lower body panel 1587905 With the jack head positioned correctly on the metal jacking flange it should look like this from underneath 1587906 Do not lift the vehicle using the plastic lower body panel 5 40 SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE 5 Put the compact spare tire near the flat tire A WARNING Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous If the vehicle slips off the jack you could be badly injured or killed Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack A WARNING Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehi cle fall To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle A WARNING Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dan gerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training The jack pro vided with your vehicle is designed only for changing a flat tire If it is used for anything else you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack Use the jack provided with your vehicle only for changing a flat tire 5 41 988777 6 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle clockwise Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the road tire to clear the ground 806071
375. t track If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD lt lt REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse play back quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this push button to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance play back quickly within a track Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the track The elapsed time of the track displays RDM Random With random tracks can be listened to in random rather than sequential order To play the tracks from the CD press the DVD CD AUX button when not sourced to the CD or insert a disc partway into the slot A RDM label displays Press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays Press the pushbutton again to turn off ran dom play BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or DVD is playing The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for viewing entertainment DVD CD AUX Auxiliary Press this button to cycle through DVD CD or Auxiliary when listening to the radio The DVD CD text label and a message showing the track or chapter number dis plays when a disc is in either slot Press this button again and the system automati cally searches for an
376. t working properly Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD on board diagnostic system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diag 3 23 nosed by the system The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control sys tems during normal driving This may take several days of routine driving If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection Oil Pressure Light T1 808235 If you have a low engine oil pressure prob lem this light will stay on after you start your engine or come on when you are driving This indicates that your engine is not receiving enough oil The engine could be low on oil or could have some other oil problem Have it fixed immediately The oil light could also come on in three other situations When the ignition is on but the engine is not running the light will come on as a test to show you it is working but the light will go out when you turn the igni tion to START If it does not come on with the ignition on you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb Have it fixed right away f the vehicle is idling at a stop sign the light may blink on an
377. tart your vehicle by push ing or pulling it will not work and it could damage your vehicle 1 Check the other vehicle It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system aged Only use vehicles with 12 volt systems with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle 2 Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach but be sure the vehicles are not touching each other If they are it could cause a ground connection you do not want You would not be able to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure Put an automatic transaxle in PARK P or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake CAUTION If you leave your radio or other accessories on during the jump start ing procedure they could be dam aged The repairs would not be covered by your warranty Always turn off your radio and other acces sories when jump starting your vehi cle 3 Turn off the ignition on both vehicles Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets Turn off the radio and all lamps that are not needed This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries And it could save the radio Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive and negative
378. tarts have already been used The maximum number of remote starts or remote start attempts between ignition cycles with the key is two Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start system enabled The system may be enabled or disabled through the DIC Refer to REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Personaliza tion in Driver Information Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section for addi tional information 2 5 Doors and Locks Door Locks WARNING Unlocked doors can be dangerous Passengers especially children can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle When a door is locked the handle will not open it You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors are not locked So wear safety belts properly and lock the doors whenever you drive Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer per manent injuries or even death from heat stroke Always lock your vehi cle whenever you leave it Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle Locking your doors can help prevent this from happening There are a couple of ways to manually lock or unlock your vehicle From the outside use the key in the driver s door From the inside use the lock control on the door Power Do
379. tch nearest to the seat once to turn the heated seat on to the high set ting Both indicator lights will be lit Press the switch a second time to turn the heated seat to the low setting One indicator light will be lit Press the switch a third time to turn the heated seat off SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Manual Reclining Seatbacks A WARNING You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver s seat while the vehicle is moving The sudden movement could startle and confuse you or make you push a pedal when you do not want to Adjust the driver s seat only when the vehicle is not moving A WARNING If the seatback is not locked it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash That could cause injury to the person sitting there Always push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is locked SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Driver s seat with manual recline and manual height adjuster shown Passenger seat with folding seatback option shown 1618868 To adjust the seatback on the driver s seat lift the lever on the rear outboard side of the seat and move the seatback to the desired position Then release the lever to lock the seatback in place 1 3 1618866 To adjust the seatback on the front passen ger s seat lift the lever on the outboard side of the seat and move the seatback to the desired position Then release the lever to lock the s
380. tem has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error displays it means that the radio has not been configured properly for your vehi cle and it must be returned to your dealer for service Locked This message displays when the THEFT LOCKS system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer INSTRUMENT PANEL Radio Messages for XM Only Refer to XM Radio Messages in this sec tion later in this section for further detail Playing a CD in either the DVD or CD slot Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing loading a disc into the sys tem depending on media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin play ing If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio face plate The DVD CD decks upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs CD R CD RW and MP3s When a CD is inserted the text label DVD or CD symbol appears on the left side of the radio display As each new track starts to play t
381. terminal locations on that vehicle You will not use your vehicle s battery for jump starting It has a remote posi tive jump starting terminal located on the underhood fuse block for that purpose Refer to Engine Compart ment Overview in this section for more information on location 871917 To uncover the remote positive ter minal press the tab at the bottom of the fuse block and lift the cover up Always use the remote positive ter minal instead of the positive termi nal on the battery WARNING An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you Keep hands clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan WARNING Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running WARNING Using a match near a battery cause battery gas to explode People have been hurt doing this and some have been blinded Use a flashlight if you need more light Be sure the battery has enough water You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle But if a battery has filler caps be sure the right amount of fluid is there If it is low add water to take care of that first If you do not explosive gas could be present Continued SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE A WARNING Continued Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you Do not
382. tery Saver Active or Service Battery Charging System If this message is dis played it is recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads as much as possible Refer to DIC Warnings and Mes sages in this section Battery Run Down Protection Your vehicle has a battery saver feature designed to protect the vehicle s battery When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is turned off the battery rundown protection system will automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes This will avoid draining the battery This vehicle also has a retained accessory power feature If the radio is on it will turn off after 10 min utes or if any door on the vehicle is opened Refer to Retained Accessory Power RAP in Starting and Operating Your Vehicle in the Features and Con trols section Accessory Power Outlet s The accessory power outlets can be used to connect electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or CB radio Your vehicle may have four accessory power outlets They are located on the instrument panel below the climate con trols inside the front center console stor age bin under the cupholders at the rear of the center console and in the rear cargo area To use the outlets remove the cover When not in use always cover the outlet with the protective cap CAUTION Leaving electrical equipment on for extended periods will drain the bat tery Always turn off electrical equ
383. that are in the selected band 1 Information Press this button to switch the display between the radio station frequency and the time When the ignition is off press this button to display the time Setting Preset Stations Up to 18 stations six FM1 six FM2 and six AM can be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons by performing the following steps 1 Turn the radio on 2 Press BAND to select FM1 AM 3 Tune in the desired station 4 Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds Whenever that pushbut ton is pressed and released the station that was set returns 5 Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton FM2 or Setting the Tone Bass Treble EQ Equalization To adjust the bass or treble press the tune knob or EQ button until the desired tone control label appears on the display Turn the tune knob clockwise or counterclock wise to increase or decrease the setting You can also adjust the setting by pressing either the SEEK FWD forward or REV reverse buttons The display shows the current bass or treble level If a station s frequency is weak or if there is static decrease the treble Adjusting the Speakers Balance Fade C BAL FADE Balance Fade To adjust the balance or fade press this button or the tune knob until the desired speaker control label appears on the dis play Turn the tune knob clockwise or coun terclockwi
384. that are in the selected band 3 45 1 Information XM Satellite Radio Service MP3 and RDS Features Press the information button to display additional text information related to the current FM RDS or XM station or MP3 song A choice of additional information such as Channel Song Artist and CAT may appear Continue pressing the infor mation button to highlight the desired label or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of the labels and the information about that label is displayed When information is not available No Info displays Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is parked Tune to your favorite stations using the presets favorites button and steering wheel controls if equipped Refer to Defensive Driving in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section FAV Favorites A maximum of 36 stations can be pro grammed as favorites using the six push buttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button FAV button Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites each having six favorite stations available per page Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM FM or XM if equipped stations To store a station as a favorite perform the following steps 1 Tune to the desired radio stati
385. the portable device if the volume does not go loud or soft enough BAND Press this button to listen to the radio when a portable audio device is playing The por table audio device continues playing so you may want to stop it or power it off CD AUX CD Auxiliary Press this button to play a CD when a por table audio device is playing Press this button again and the system begins play ing audio from the connected portable audio player If a portable audio player is not connected No Input Device Found displays 3 49 Radio with CD and DVD MP3 w eT 71 7 I7 I7 1 7 17 SEEK SEEK 1631251 If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertain ment RSE system it has a CD DVD radio Refer to Rear Seat Entertainment System in this section for more informa tion on the vehicle s RSE system The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media DTS and DTS 2 0 are trade marks_of Digital Theater Systems Inc Dolby is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the dou ble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Radio Data System RDS The audio system has a Radio Data Sys tem RDS The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information This system relies upon receiving specific information from these stations and only wor
386. the ID3 tag then the radio displays the file name with out the extension such as mp3 as the track name Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened The display does not show parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the file name is not displayed Preprogrammed Playlists You can access preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp Music Match or Real Jukebox software however you do not have playlist editing capability using the radio These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files Playing an MP3 Insert a CD R partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD R should begin playing If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD R in the player it stays in the player When you turn on the ignition or radio the CD R starts to play where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source As each new track starts to play the track number and song title appears on the dis play The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch 8 cm single CD Rs with an adapter ring Full size CD Rs and the smaller CD Rs are loaded in the same manner If playing a CD R the sound quality may be reduced due to CD R quality the method of recording the quality of the music that has been recorded and the way the CD R has been handled There may be an increase in skipping difficulty in finding tracks and or diffi
387. the first 10 minute time frame has ended the first 10 minutes will immediately expire and the second 10 minute time frame will start For example if the lock button and then the remote start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for five minutes 10 minutes are added allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes After your vehicle s engine has been started two times using the remote vehicle start button the vehicle s ignition switch must be turned to RUN and then back to LOCK using the key before the remote start procedure can be used again If you enter the vehicle after a remote start and the engine is running insert the key into the ignition switch and turn it to the RUN position to drive the vehicle To manually shut off the engine after a remote start do any of the following Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off Turn on the hazard warning flashers Insert the vehicle s key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to RUN and then back to LOCK 2 4 FEATURES AND CONTROLS The remote vehicle start feature will not operate if The vehicle s key is in the ignition The vehicle s hood liftgate or doors are not closed The hazard warning flashers are on There is an emission control system malfunction The engine coolant temperature is too high The oil pressure is low Two remote vehicle s
388. the interior air to cool the car faster The indicator light on the recirculation but ton lights whenever the system switches to recirculation Switch to outside air by pressing the outside air button if the vehi cle has a rear climate control system or by pressing the recirculation button See AUX for more information The next time AUTO fan or mode is selected the air inlet resets back to AUTO operation Manual Operation 99 Fan Turn the left knob to increase or decrease the fan speed In any setting other than off the fan runs continuously with the ignition on To turn off the air completely turn the fan to 0 and select the recirculation button Temperature Control Turn the center knob to increase or decrease the temperature inside your vehi cle Use the right knob to select from the fol lowing modes There is one position between each mode to finely adjust airflow position gt e 74 Vent This mode directs air to the instrument panel outlets e Bi Level This mode directs approximately half of the air to the instrument panel outlets and then directs the remaining air to the floor outlets V Floor This mode directs most of the air to the floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield and side window outlets The right knob can also be used to select the defrost and defog modes that are described in this section The modes can also be selected by press ing the following
389. the next folder in the file struc ture that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD R contains only compressed files the files are located under the root 3 59 folder The next and previous folder func tions do not display on a CD R that was recorded without folders or playlists When the CD R contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons searches playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R are played in the following order Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist When the last track of the last playlist has been played play continues from the first track of the first playlist Play begins from the first track in the first folder continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder When the last track of the last folder has played play continues from the first track of the first folder When play enters a new folder the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless you have chosen the folder mode as the default display The new track name appears on the display File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag If the song name is not present in
390. the wheel wrench counterclock wise to lower the spare tire Keep turn ing the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehi cle If the spare tire does not lower to the ground the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower Refer to Secondary Latch System in this section for more information 1306942 4 Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable when the tire has been completely low ered and pull it through the wheel opening 5 Pull the tire out from under the vehicle CAUTION If you drive away before the spare tire or secondary latch system cable has been reinstalled you could damage your vehicle Always reinstall this cable before driving your vehicle 6 Put the spare tire near the flat tire Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 809981 1 Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts Do not remove them yet 2 Attach the wheel wrench to the jack bolt head and rotate the wheel wrench clockwise That will raise the lift head a little 3 Place the jack near the flat tire CAUTION Make sure that the jack lift head is in the correct position or you may dam age your vehicle The repairs would not be covered by your warranty SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE 1399879 4 Find the arrow on the plastic lower body panel Position the jack head under the metal jacking flange and no
391. ther Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint If the child restraint does not have a top tether one can be obtained in kit form for many child restraints Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations Second Row Seat 1552146 afl Top Tether Anchor Seating positions with top tether anchors Lower Anchor Seating positions with two lower anchors Each second row seating position has exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion 1708261 The top tether anchors for each second row seating position are located on the base of the seatback Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed Do not secure a child restraint in the right front passenger s position or the third row if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached There is no place to attach the top tether in this position Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat Refer to Where to Put the Restraint in this section for additional information Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System
392. time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops Always leave enough room up ahead to stop even though you have ABS Using ABS Do not pump the brakes Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you You may hear the anti lock pump or motor operate and feel the brake pedal pulsate but this is normal 4 4 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Braking in Emergencies With ABS you can steer and brake at the same time In many emergencies steering can help you more than even the very best braking Traction Control System TCS Your vehicle has a traction control system that limits wheel spin This is especially useful in slippery road conditions The sys tem operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction When this hap pens the system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin A ee 1545635 This light will come on when your traction control system is limiting wheel spin You may feel or hear the system working but this is normal This light may also come on after extended heavy braking indicating the brakes have become too hot to limit wheel spin The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle To limit wheel spin especially in slippery road conditions you should always leave 4 5 the system on But you can turn the trac tion control system off if you ever need to You shoul
393. tion When replacing the fuel cap turn it clock wise until it clicks Make sure the cap is fully installed The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere Refer to Malfunction Indicator Lamp in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section A WARNING If a fire starts while you are refueling do not remove the nozzle Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant Leave the area immedi ately CAUTION If you need a new fuel cap be sure to get the right type Your dealer can get one for you If you get the wrong type it may not fit properly This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions system Refer to Malfunction Indicator Lamp in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instrument Panel section SERVICE AND APPEARANCE CARE Filling a Portable Fuel Container A WARNING Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle Static elec tricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs To help avoid injury to you and others Dispense gasoline approved containers Do not fill a container while it is in a vehicle s only into inside a vehicle trun
394. tire dressing products on your vehicle may dam age the paint finish and or tires When applying a tire dressing always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on your vehicle Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement make sure the body repair shop applies anti cor rosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty Finish Damage Any stone chips fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your SUZUKI dealer Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your SUZUKI dealer s body and paint shop Underbody Maintenance Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the under body If these are not removed corrosion and rust can develop on the underbody parts such as fuel lines frame floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection At least every spring flush these materials from the underbody with plain water Clean any areas where mud and debris can col lect Dirt packed in close areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed Your dealer or an underbody car washin
395. to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured ina crash Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions Follow that manufacturer s instruc tions To help avoid damage to your vehicle drive slowly readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle and do not spin your vehicle s wheels If you do find trac tion devices that will fit install them on the front tires If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving especially if you maintain your vehicle s tires properly If air goes out of a tire it is much more likely to leak out slowly But if you should ever have a blow out here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do If a front tire fails the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly Steer to maintain lane position and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane A rear blowout particularly on a curve acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid In any rear blowout remove your foot from the accelerator pedal Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go It may be very bumpy and noisy but you can still steer Gently brake to a stop well off the road i
396. top A hiss means that there is still some pressure left You can be burned if you spill cool ant on hot engine parts Coolant con tains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough Do not spill coolant on a hot engine 3 Fill the cooling system with the proper DEX COOL coolant mixture up to the base of the filler neck Refer to Engine Coolant in this section for more infor mation about the proper coolant mix ture 4 Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine and the compartment 1631525 5 Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold fill line 6 Reinstall the coolant recovery tank cap and the pressure cap 7 If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantly low you should have your dealership service department inspect the vehicle for leaks Power Steering Fluid Li 812554 Refer to Engine Compartment Overview in this section for reservoir location When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem Have the system inspected and repaired How to Check Power Steering Fluid To check the power steering fluid do the following 1 Turn the key off and let the engine com partment cool down 2 Wipe the cap and the top of the reser voir clean 3 Un
397. tors in the Instrument Panel section 2 Putthe child restraint on the seat 3 Pick up the latch plate and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle s safety belt through or around the restraint The child restraint instructions will show you how 1379321 4 Buckle the belt Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1379324 5 Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock 1379355 6 To tighten the belt push down on the child restraint pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of 1 32 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor If you are using forward facing child restraint you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt You should not be able to pull more of the belt from the retrac tor once the lock has been set 7 Push and pull the child restraint in dif ferent directions to be sure it is secure 8 If the airbag is off the off indicator on the instrument panel will be lit and stay lit when the key is turned to RUN or START If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit turn the vehicle off Remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
398. ture Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OFF None of the doors will automatically unlock DRIVER AT KEY OUT Only the driver s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition DRIVER IN PARK Only the driver s door will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P ALL AT KEY OUT All of the doors will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition ALL IN PARK default All of the doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK P NO CHANGE No change will be made to this feature The current setting will remain INSTRUMENT PANEL Choose one of the available settings and press the set reset button while it is dis played on the DIC to select it REMOTE LOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter You will not receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if any of the doors are open Refer to Remote Keyless Entry RKE System Operation in Keys in the Features and Controls section for more information Press the vehicle information button until REMOTE LOCK appears on the DIC dis play Press the set reset button to access the settings for this feature Then press the vehicle information button to scroll through the following settings OFF There will be no feedback when you press the lock button
399. ty Unlike the data record ers on many airplanes these on board systems do not record sounds such as conversation of vehicle occupants To read this information special equipment is needed and access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data is required Suzuki will not access information about a crash event or share it with others other than with the consent of the vehicle owner or if the vehicle is leased with the consent of the lessee in response to an official request of police or similar government office as part of Suzuki s defense of litiga tion through the discovery process or as required by law In addition once Suzuki collects or receives data Suzuki may use the data for Suzuki research needs make it available for research where appropriate confidentiality is to be maintained and need is shown or share summary data which is not tied to a specific vehicle with non Suzuki organizations for research purposes 7 3 Others such as law enforcement may have access to the special equipment that can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the device that stores the data Reporting Safety Defects If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying American Suzuki Motor Corp If NHTSA receives similar compl
400. u _ Display Menu Press this button to adjust the brightness screen display mode normal full or zoom and display the language menu amp gt Return Press this button to exit the current active menu and return to the previous menu This button will operate only when the dis play menu or a DVD menu is active Bl Stop Press this button to stop playing rewind ing or fast forwarding a DVD Press this button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD gt Play Pause Press this button to start playing a DVD Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause it Press it again to continue playing the DVD When the DVD is playing depending on the radio you may be able to do slow play by pressing the pause button then pressing the fast forward button The DVD will con 3 70 INSTRUMENT PANEL tinue playing in a slow play mode You may also depending on the radio perform reverse slow play by pressing the pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button To cancel slow play mode press the play pause button I4 Previous Track Chapter Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter Press this but ton again to go to the previous track or chapter This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright informa tion or the previews B Next Track Chapter Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track This button may not
401. u can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time press the set reset button If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC stop as soon as you can Have the tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading Information label Refer to Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section and Inflation Tire Pressure in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section The DIC dis play also shows the tire pressure values for the front and rear tires by pressing the vehicle information button Refer to DIC Operation and Displays in this section If the tire pressure is low the low tire pres sure warning light comes on Refer to Tire Pressure Light in this section DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays when the driver s door is not closed properly When this message appears make sure that the driver s door is closed completely ENGINE HOT A C Air Conditioning OFF This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature To avoid added strain on a hot engine the air conditioning compressor is automatically turned off When the coolant temperature returns to normal the A C operation automatically resumes You can continue to drive your vehicle ENGINE OVERHEATD Overheate
402. u must drive with the liftgate open or if elec trical wiring or other cable connec tions must pass through the seal between the body and the liftgate or liftglass Make sure all other windows are shut Turn the fan on your climate con trol system to its highest speed and select the control setting that will force outside air into your vehi cle See Climate Control System in the Index f you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel open them all the way Refer to Engine Exhaust in this section To unlock the liftgate press the unlock but ton on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter twice or use the power door lock switch To lock the liftgate press the lock button on the RKE transmitter or use the power door lock switch The liftgate does not have a key lock cylinder 2 7 To open the liftgate pull up on the handle located in the center of the liftgate When closing the liftgate use the molded handles to pull the liftgate down Push the liftgate closed until it latches Liftgate Operation with Loss of Power The liftgate is equipped with an electric latch If the battery is disconnected or has low voltage the liftgate will not open 1799172 To open the liftgate if this happens remove the interior trim plug located at the base of the liftgate from inside the vehicle a aN 1799191 Use a tool to push the service release lever located on the latch until
403. uki specific wheel and tire systems developed for your vehicle and have them properly installed by a Suzuki certified technician Refer to Buying New Tires and Accesso ries and Modifications in this section for additional information Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where appli cable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera ture A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis tration NHTSA which grades tires by treadwear traction and temperature per formance This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passen ger car tires The Uniform Tire Quality Grading UTQG system does not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches 25 to 30 cm or to some limited production tires While the tires available may vary with respect to these grades they must also conform to federal safety requirements Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rat ing based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half 1 5 times as well on the government course as a tire grad
404. uld be checked regularly for proper aim so should your eyes be examined regularly Some drivers suffer from night blindness the inability to see in dim light and are not even aware of it Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads T a VAN a 1527470 Rain and wet roads can mean driving trou ble On a wet road you cannot stop accel erate or turn as well because your tire to road traction is not as good as on dry roads And if your tires do not have much tread left you will get even less traction It is always wise to go slower and be cau tious if rain starts to fall while you are driv ing The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement The heavier the rain the harder it is to see Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals pavement markings the edge of the road and even people walking It is wise to keep your windshield wiper and washer system in good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the wind shield or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts A WARNING Wet brakes can cause accidents They may not work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side You could lose control of the veh
405. um Vehicle Maximum Vehicle A Capacity Weight for ree n A Capacity Weight for 453 K A Capacity Weight for 453 ia Example 1 9 Example 2 9 Example 3 9 Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant B Weight 150 Ibs 68 0956 B Weight 150 lbs 68 eae B Weight 200 Ibs 91 he a kg x2 9 kg x2 9 kg 5 9 C Available Occupant 700 Ibs C Available Occupant 250 Ibs C Available Cargo 0 Ibs and Cargo Weight 317 kg Weight 113 kg Weight 0 kg Refer to your vehicle s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle s maximum vehicle capacity weight and seating positions The combined weight of the driver passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehi cle s maximum vehicle capacity weight 4 18 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Certification Label Mro BY SUZUKI MOTOR LTD JAPAN GYWR GAWA m amp AR tmo TIRE PRESS TA amp RR ICABLE FED PN STANOAROS IN EE JATE or MANUFACTURE 52D059 A vehicle specific Certification Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver s door The label shows the size of your original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle all occu pants fuel and cargo The Certification Tire label also t
406. une to your favorite stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them A WARNING This system provides you with a far greater access to audio stations and song listings Giving extended atten tion to entertainment tasks while driving can cause a crash and you or others can be injured or killed Always keep your eyes on the road and your mind on the drive avoid engaging in extended searching while driving Keeping your mind on the drive is impor tant for safe driving Here are some ways in which you can help avoid distraction while driving While your vehicle is parked e Familiarize yourself with all of its con trols e Familiarize yourself with its operation Set up your audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations setting the tone and adjusting the speakers Then when driving conditions permit you can tune to your favorite radio stations using the presets and steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them CAUTION Before adding any sound equipment to your vehicle such as an audio system CD player CB radio mobile telephone or two way radio make sure that it can be added by checking with your dealer Also check federal rules covering mobile radio and tele phone units If sound equipment can be added it is very important to do it properly Added sound equipment can interfere with the operation of your vehicle s engine radio or other systems and even da
407. ur last oil change Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed How to Reset the Engine Oil Life Sys tem The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use Anytime your oil is 5 9 changed reset the system so it can calcu late when the next oil change is required If a situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a change engine oil light or CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message being turned on reset the system 1 Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off 2 Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds The change engine oil light will flash while the system is resetting 3 When the light stops flashing turn the key to LOCK If the light or message comes back on and stays on when you start your vehicle the engine oil life system has not reset Repeat the procedure What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long Clean your skin and nails with soap and water or a good hand cleaner Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil See the manufacturer s warn ings about the use and disposal of oil prod ucts Used oil can be a threat to the environ ment If you change your own oil be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before dis
408. ur vehicle s three control systems In the braking skid your wheels are not rolling In the steering or cornering skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force And in the 4 8 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE acceleration skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal Remember Any traction control system helps avoid only the acceleration skid If your traction system is off then an acceler ation skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal Refer to Traction Control System TCS and Electronic Stability Control in this section If your vehicle starts to slide ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go If you start steering quickly enough your vehicle may straighten out Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs Of course traction is reduced when water snow ice gravel or other material is on the road For safety you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these con ditions It is important to slow down on slip pery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more lim ited While driving on a surface with reduced traction try your best to avoid sudden steering acceleration or braking including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear Any sudden
409. us track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright informa tion or the previews SEEK Next Track Chapter Press this button to go to the next track or chapter This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright informa tion or the previews 4 REV Reverse Press this button to quickly reverse the CD or DVD at five times the normal speed The radio displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse To stop fast reversing press this button again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copy right information or the previews gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the CD or DVD The radio displays the elapsed time and fast forwards five times the normal speed To stop fast forwarding press this button again This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Eject Press this button to eject a CD or DVD If a CD or DVD is ejected but not removed the player automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed because of an unknown for mat etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the CD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject DVD V Video Display Buttons Once a DVD V is inserted the radio dis play menu shows several tag options for DVD playing Press the pushbuttons located under any desir
410. use a metal object 3 Slide the new battery into the transmit ter with the positive side of the battery facing down Use a type CR2032 bat tery or equivalent type 4 Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure no moisture can enter 5 Check the operation of the transmitter Remote Vehicle Start Your vehicle may have the remote start feature This feature allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle Refer to REMOTE START under DIC Vehicle Personalization in Driver Information Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section for instructions on how to enable and disable this feature During a remote start the climate control system will turn on at the fan temperature and mode settings the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off and will also turn on the rear window defogger Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters For example some laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view when doing so Check local regula tions for any requirements on remote start ing of vehicles Remote Vehicle Start Press and release the lock button and then press and hold the remote start button to start the vehicle Your RKE transmitter with the remote start button provides an increased range of operation However the range may be less while the vehicle is running As a result you may need to be closer to your vehicl
411. use the child restraint and its attachments The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attach ments or top tether anchors and attach ments SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Lower Anchors 1550469 Lower anchors A are metal bars built into the vehicle There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments B 1 26 SEATS AND RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Top Tether Anchor 1550581 A top tether A C anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle The top tether attachment B on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash Your child restraint may have a single tether A or a dual tether C Either will have a single attachment B to secure the top tether to the anchor Some child restraints that have a top tether are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached Others require the top tether always to be attached In Can ada the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top tether and that the tether be attached In the United 1 27 States some child restraints also have a top te
412. usic navigator feature to play MP3 files on the CD R in order by artist or album Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information It may take several minutes to scan the disc 3 60 INSTRUMENT PANEL depending on the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD R The radio may begin playing while it is scanning the disc in the background When the scan is fin ished the CD R begins playing again Once the disc has been scanned the player defaults to playing MP3 files in order by artist The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display between the arrows Once all songs by that artist are played the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order on the CD R and begins playing files by that art ist If you want to listen to MP3 files by another artist press the pushbutton located below either arrow button You will go to the next or previous artist in alpha betical order Continue pressing either but ton until the desired artist is displayed To change from playback by artist to play back by album press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label From the sort screen push one of the buttons below the album button Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen Now the album name is displayed on the second line between the arrows and songs from t
413. ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice you will understand this The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface the angle at which the curve is banked and your speed While you are in a curve speed is the one factor you can control Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve Then you suddenly accelerate Both control systems steering and accelera tion have to do their work where the tires meet the road Adding the sudden acceler ation can demand too much of those places You can lose control Refer to Traction Control System TCS and Electronic Stability Control in this section What should you do if this ever happens Ease up on the brake or accelerator pedal steer the vehicle the way you want it to go and slow down Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed Of course the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions Under less 4 6 DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE favorable conditions you will want to go slower If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve do it before you enter the curve while your front wheels are straight ahead Try to adjust your speed so you can drive through the curve Maintain a reasonable steady speed Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve and then accelerate gently into the straightaway Adding non Suzuki accessories can affect your vehicle
414. ve box lift the handle up Cupholder s There are two cupholders with removable liners located in front of the center console armrest To access slide the cover back The two cupholders are located in a removable tray To remove the tray press the tab located at the front of the tray and pull up To replace the tray place the two tabs at the rear of the tray into the slots and press the tray down Underneath the tray is an additional storage area There are cupholders located in the sec ond row seat armrest To access pull the armrest down If your vehicle has the third row seat there will be a cupholder located next to each side Sunglasses Storage Compartment Your vehicle may have a sunglasses stor age compartment located near the rear view mirror Push the cover to open Garage Door Opener Compartment Your vehicle may have a garage door opener compartment It is located next to the sunglasses storage compartment Push the latch to open Center Console Storage Area Your vehicle has a center console armrest with storage area Use the top lever on the front of the console to open it There is an additional storage area underneath the center console To access use the bottom lever and pull the console up Assist Handles There are assist handles with garment hooks located above the rear passenger doors Luggage Carrier A WARNING If you try to carry something on top of your vehicle that is longer or wide
415. vehicle If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water drive through them very slowly Driving Through Flowing Water WARNING Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces If you try to drive through flowing water as you might at a low water crossing your vehicle can be carried away As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle If this hap pens you and other vehicle occu pants could drown Do not ignore police warning signs and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water Some Other Rainy Weather Tips Turn on your low beam headlamps not just your parking lamps to help make you more visible to others 4 11 Besides slowing down allow some extra following distance And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle Allow yourself more clear room ahead and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray Have good tires with proper tread depth Refer to Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section City Driving Vira 1527452 One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them You will want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving Know the best way to get to where you are going
416. vehicle Refer to Content Theft Deterrent in Theft Deterrent Systems in the Fea tures and Controls section for more infor mation TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays when the Tire Pres sure Monitor TPM system is re learning the tire positions Refer to Tire Pressure Monitor System in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section The tire positions must be re learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor Refer to Tire Inspection and Rotation and Inflation Tire Pressure in Tires in the Service and Appearance Care section for more information TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message displays when the Traction Control System TCS turns off Refer to Traction Control System TCS in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section for more information This message only displays while the igni tion is in RUN and disappears after 10 sec onds unless it is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears Any of the following conditions may cause the TCS to turn off 3 34 INSTRUMENT PANEL The TCS is turned off by pressing the traction control button Refer to Traction Control System TCS in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driv ing Your Vehicle section for more infor mation The battery is low There is a TCS failure See your dealer for service TRACTION CONTROL ON This message displays when the
417. vehicle serviced promptly because an adult size person sitting in the right front passenger s seat may not have the protection of the frontal airbag Refer to Airbag Readiness Light in Warning Lights Gages and Indicators in the Instru ment Panel section for more on this including important safety informa tion A thick layer of additional material such as a blanket or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers seat heaters and seat massagers can affect how well the pas senger sensing system operates Remove any additional material from the seat cush ion before reinstalling or securing the child restraint and before a small occupant including a small adult sits in the passen ger position You may want to consider not using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment Refer to Adding Equipment to Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle in this sec tion for more information about modifica tions that can affect how the system operates A WARNING Stowing of articles under the passen ger s seat or between the passen ger s seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced There are parts of the airbag system in several places around your vehi cle You do not want the system to inflate while someone is working on your vehicle Your dealer and the service manual have info
418. vel as recommended in this manual Recheck fluid level after filling Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap 3 6 L V6 7 Automatic 0 043 inches 1 10 mm 5 57 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Maintenance Schedule eere 6 1 Scheduled Maintenance except CANADA 6 3 For CANADA Scheduled Maintenance 6 8 Owner Checks and Services 6 13 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended Maintenance Requirements CAUTION Maintenance intervals checks inspections replacement parts and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are nec essary to keep your vehicle in good working condition Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by warranty 6 1 Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condi tion but also helps the environment All recommended maintenance is important Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire infla tion can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle To help protect our envi ronment and to keep your vehicle in good
419. vels can be viewed by the driver For additional information and details about the DIC operation and dis plays refer to DIC Operation and Dis plays and DIC Warnings and Messages in Driver Information Center DIC in the Instrument Panel section The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you start to drive This may be an early indica tor that the air pressure in the tire s are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure A Tire and Loading Information Label attached to your vehicle shows the size of your vehicle s original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehi cle s tires when they are cold Refer to Loading Your Vehicle in Your Driving the Road and Your Vehicle in the Driving Your Vehicle section for an example of the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle Also refer to Inflation Tire Pressure in this section Your vehicle s TPMS system can warn you about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance Refer to Tire Inspection and Rotation and Tires in this section CAUTION Do not use a tire sealant if your vehi cle has Tire Pressure Monitors The liquid sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor sensors The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPM
420. ven make the vehi cle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing win dow Do not leave the keys in a vehi cle with children 805686 One key is used for the ignition and all of the locks 2 1 Key code information can be obtained by your dealer These code numbers can be used to make new keys Additional keys that are needed can be made at any retail service facility provided you have the key code information Store this information in a safe place but not in your vehicle Have extra keys made Your service parts department can make extra keys for you NOTE If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle you may have to damage the vehicle to get in Be sure you have spare keys Remote Keyless Entry RKE System The remote keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission FCC Rules and with Industry Canada This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the fol lowing two conditions This device may not cause harmful inter ference This device must accept any interfer ence received including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause interference This device
421. ver all the way into PARK P as you maintain brake application Then press the button on the shift lever and move the shift lever into the gear you wish If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot shift out of PARK P try this 1 Turn the key to LOCK FEATURES AND CONTROLS 2 Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4 3 Shift to NEUTRAL N 4 Start the vehicle and then shift to the desired drive gear 5 Have your vehicle fixed as soon as you can Parking Over Things That Burn 806406 WARNING Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite Do not park over papers leaves dry grass or other things that can burn 2 18 FEATURES AND CONTROLS Engine Exhaust WARNING Engine exhaust can kill It contains the gas carbon monoxide CO which you cannot see or smell It can cause unconsciousness and death You might have exhaust coming in if e The exhaust system sounds strange or different e Your vehicle gets rusty under neath Your vehicle was damaged in a col lision Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris Repairs were not done correctly Your vehicle or the exhaust system has been modified improperly If you ever suspect exhaust is com ing into your vehicle Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO and Have your vehicle fixed
422. wise or counter clockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed Turn the knob all the way counter clockwise to turn the rear system off Temperature Knob The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the temperature of the air flow ing into the passenger area Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer air Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area for cooler air Mode Knob The right knob on the control panel lets you to choose the direction of air delivery e 74 Vent This setting directs the air through the headliner outlets V Bi Level This setting directs the air through the floor outlets as well as the headliner outlets The rear system floor outlets are located near third row seats The flow can be divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon where the knob is placed between the settings V Floor This setting directs most of the air through the floor outlets The rear system floor out lets are located near third row seats Passenger Compartment Air Filter Outside air is routed through a passenger compartment air filter before entering the vehicle This filter removes certain parti cles from the air including pollen and dust particles Reductions in airflow which may occur more quickly in dusty areas indicate that the filter needs to be replaced early The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance Refer to Scheduled Maintenan
423. work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Fast Reverse Press this button to fast reverse the DVD or CD To stop fast reversing a DVD video press the play button To stop fast revers ing a DVD audio or CD release the fast reverse button This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews Fast Forward Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD To stop fast forwarding a DVD video press the play button To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD release the fast forward button This button may not work when the DVD is playing the copy right information or the previews 3 71 a Audio Press this button to change audio tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc C Subtitles Press this button to turn ON OFF subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc AUX Auxiliary Press this button to switch the system between the DVD player and an auxiliary source H4 Camera Press this button to change camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is playing The format and content of this function will vary for each disc 1 through 0 Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad provides the capabil ity of direct chapter or track number selec tion 5
424. ws to work when the Starting Procedure onds between each try to allow the ignition key is in RUN or ACC Once the 1 With your foot off the accelerator pedal cranking motor to cool down key is turned from RUN to LOCK the radio turn the ignition key to START When will continue to work 10 minutes or until the the engine starts let go of the key The 2 If the engine does not start after 5 10 driver s door is opened Also the power idle speed will go down as your engine seconds especially in very cold windows will continue to work for up to 10 gets warm Do not race the engine weather below 0 F 18 C it could be minutes or until any door is opened 2 13 immediately after starting it Operate the engine and transaxle gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all mov ing parts Your vehicle has a Computer Con trolled Cranking System This feature assists in starting the engine and pro tects components If the ignition key is turned to the START position and then released when the engine begins cranking the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts If the engine does not start and the key is held in START for many seconds cranking will be stopped flooded with too much gasoline Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds Wait at least 15 seconds between each try to allow the cranking
425. y belt belt 1 25 1507704 A Child restraint or occupant using safety belt B Child restraint using LATCH Wherever you install a child restraint be sure to secure the child restraint properly Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehi cle Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle even when no child is in it Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children LATCH The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system Make sure that a LATCH compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors or use the vehicle s safety belts to secure the restraint following the instruc tions that came with that restraint and also the instructions in this manual When installing a child restraint with a top tether you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instruc tions on how to
426. y fluids and some component wear by prod ucts contain and or emit these chemicals Doing Your Own Service Work A WARNING You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it Be sure you have sufficient knowl edge experience the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle mainte nance task Be sure to use the proper nuts bolts and other fasteners English and metric fasteners can be easily confused If you use the wrong fas teners parts can later break or fall off You could be hurt If you want to do some of your own service work you will want to use the proper ser vice manual It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this man ual can Your vehicle has an airbag system Before attempting to do your own service work refer to Servicing Your Airbag Equipped Vehicle in Airbag System in the Seats and Restraint Systems section You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform Refer to Maintenance Record in Maintenance Schedule in the Maintenance Schedule section Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your Vehicle Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance Check with your dealer before adding equipmen
427. yer Root Directory The root directory of the CD R is treated as a folder If the root directory has com pressed audio files the directory is dis played as F1 ROOT All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory fold ers However playlists Px are always accessed before root folders or files Empty Directory or Folder If a root directory or a folder exists some where in the file structure that contains only folders subfolders and no compressed files directly beneath them the player advances to the next folder in the file struc ture that contains compressed audio files The empty folder does not display No Folder When the CD R contains only compressed files the files are located under the root folder The next and previous folder func tion does not function on a CD R that was recorded without folders or playlists When displaying the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT When the CD R contains only playlists and compressed audio files but no folders all files are located under the root folder The folder down and the folder up buttons search playlists Px first and then goes to the root folder When the radio displays the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD R are played in the following order Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each play
428. you hear or feel the gate release The liftgate can now be opened and closed manually You will need to use this procedure to open the lift gate until the power is restored Windows WARNING Leaving children helpless adults pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Never leave a child a helpless adult or a pet alone in a vehicle especially with the win dows closed in warm or hot weather 811448 Power Windows A WARNING Leaving children helpless adults or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous They can be overcome from extreme heat in warm or hot weather and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons children or others could be badly injured or even killed They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehi cle move The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing win dow Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows FEATURES AND CONTROLS 1235612 The window switches are located on each side of the shif
429. your vehicle Reducing vehicle speed Avoiding hard accelerations Avoiding steep uphill grades f you are towing a trailer reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible If the light stops flashing and remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady fol lowing If the light continues to flash when it is safe to do so stop the vehicle Find a safe place to park your vehicle Turn the key off wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine If the light remains on steady see If the Light Is On Steady following If the light is still flashing follow the previous INSTRUMENT PANEL steps and see your dealer for service as Soon as possible If the Light Is On Steady You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the fol lowing Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle If so reinstall the fuel cap making sure to fully install the cap Refer to Filling the Tank in Fuel in the Service and Appear ance Care section The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed A loose or miss ing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water If so your electrical system may be wet The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out A few
430. ys 5 Repeat the steps to remove more cate gories 3 46 INSTRUMENT PANEL Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category is dis played or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label The radio does not allow you to remove or add categories while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph 8 km h Radio Messages Calibration Error The audio system has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory If Calibration Error displays it means that the radio has not been configured properly for your vehi cle and it must be returned to your dealer for service Locked This message is displayed when the THEFTLOCK system has locked up the radio Take the vehicle to your dealer for service If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected contact your dealer Radio Messages for XM Only Refer to XM Radio Messages in this sec tion later in this section for further detail 3 47 Playing a CD Insert a CD partway into the slot label side up The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the player it stays in the player When the ignition or radio is turned on the CD starts playing where it stopped if it was the last selected audio source When a CD is inserted the CD symbol appears on the CD As each new track starts to play the track number appears on the
431. ys The CD R can be removed If the CD R is not removed after several seconds the CD R automatically pulls back into the player If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed such as unknown format etc and the disc fails to eject press and hold the DVD eject button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject 44 Tune Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the CD R that is currently playing K SEEK Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the start of the current MP3 file if more than five seconds have played If less than five sec onds have played the previous MP3 file plays Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3 file If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple times the player continues moving backward or forward through the MP3 files on the CD lt 74 Previous Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder 73 gt Next Folder Press the pushbutton positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder 4 REV Reverse Press and hold this button to reverse play back quickly within an MP3 file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this button to resume playing the file The elapsed time of the file displays gt gt FWD Fast Forward Press and hold this button to advance play back quickly within an MP3 file Sound is heard at a reduced volume Release this butt
432. ystem off such as when driving through deep snow and loose gravel to help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds Refer to Traction Control System TCS and Electronic Stability Control in this section The Anti Lock Brake System ABS improves your vehicle s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road Even though you have ABS you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement Refer to Anti Lock Brake System ABS in this section Allow greater following distance on any slippery road Watch for slippery spots The road might be fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice On an otherwise clear road ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach such as around clumps of trees behind build ings or under bridges Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear If you see a patch of ice ahead of you brake before you are on it Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice and avoid sudden steering maneu vers 4 15 If You Are Caught in a Blizzard If you are stopped by heavy snow you could be in a serious situation You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe Turn on your hazard flashers Tie a red cloth to your veh
433. ystem will remain in Parental Control To turn off Parental Control press and hold the radio power button for more than two seconds The video screen will return to the state they were in before Parental Control was turned on The padlock icon will disappear from the radio display Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or ejecting any disc an ignition cycle or pressing the play icon on the radio DVD display menu Headphones 1674951 The RSE includes two 2 channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this sys tem These headphones are used to listen to media such as CDs DVDs MP3s DVDAs radio or any auxiliary source con nected to the auxiliary input jack if your vehicle has this feature or A V jacks The wireless headphones have an On Off but ton channel 1 2 switch and a volume con trol If your vehicle has a third row video screen display it will have two additional head phones Push the power button to turn on the head phones An indicator light located on the headphones will illuminate If the light does not illuminate the batteries may need to be replaced See Battery Replacement later in this section for more information Switch the headphones to Off when not in use The infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the RSE overhead console The headphones will shut off automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system is shut off or if the headphones

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

ASUS M70AD q8668 User's Manual  - e-Lis  "/-"%2 /7.%2 3    MODE D`EMPLOI FRANÇAIS  net-advisor,net-advisor-rs,veri-net, veri-net+,and veri-net  Cambia vincite Manuale Operativo  Deep-Level Transient Spectroscopy  Operating Instructions  Instructions 1  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file